Hp B1000 Users Manual
B1000 to the manual 76188aef-e3c4-44f5-b482-8213cd2b6ec9
2015-02-09
: Hp Hp-B1000-Users-Manual-547728 hp-b1000-users-manual-547728 hp pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 239 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
- Service Handbook
- Service Handbook
- Notice
- Hewlett-Packard Warranty Statement
- Hewlett-Packard Warranty Statement
- HP PRODUCT DURATION OF WARRANTY HP Visualize Wo...
- Model B1000/C3000
- 1. HP warrants HP hardware, accessories and supplies against defects in materials and workmanship...
- 1. HP warrants HP hardware, accessories and supplies against defects in materials and workmanship...
- 2. HP warrants that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions, for the pe...
- 3. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If ...
- 4. HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been...
- 5. The warranty period begins on the date of delivery or on the date of installation if installed...
- 6. Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or ca...
- 7. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY O...
- 8. HP will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the greater of $300,000 o...
- 9. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE CUSTOMER’S SOL...
- Restricted Rights Legend
- Restricted Rights Legend
- Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government Department of Defense is subject to restri...
- © Copyright 2001 Hewlett-Packard Company. All Rights Reserved.
- This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights are res...
- UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively thr...
- © Copyright 1980, 1984 AT&T, Inc.
- © Copyright 1979, 1980, 1983 The Regents of the University of California.
- This software and documentation is based in part on the Fourth Berkeley Software Distribution und...
- Printing History
- 1 Product Information
- 1 Product Information
- This chapter introduces the HP Visualize B1000/C3000 workstations, including their controls and i...
- Included in this chapter are the following topics:
- • Product description
- B1000/C3000:product description,
- B1000/C3000:product description,
- The HP Visualize B1000 and C3000 workstations contain the following key features:
- • Processor:
- • Processor:
- • Processor:
- — One 300MHz PA8500 processor in the B1000 or one 400MHz PA8500 processor in the C3000
- — One 750MHz PA8700 processor in the C3700
- — The PA8500 processor has a 0.5MByte instruction cache and a 1.0MByte data cache
- — The PA8700 processor has a 0.75MByte instruction cache and a 1.5MByte data cache
- • Operating System:
- • User Interface:
- • Compatibility: Source and binary code compatible with the Series 700 product family
- • Monitors:
- • Optional Graphics:
- • Main Memory:
- • Internal Storage Devices:
- • Standard Network:
- • Standard I/O Ports:
- • Optional I/O:
- • Keyboard:
- • Mouse:
- • Processor:
- System Unit Front Panel Controls
- System Unit Front Panel Controls
- Figure 1-1 shows the location of the system unit front panel controls.
- Figure11. System Unit Front Panel Controls
- LCD:location,
- Power switch:soft power down procedure,
- Storage Device:controls and features,
- Storage Device:controls and features,
- This workstation allows either or both of the following internal storage devices: CD drive or flo...
- NOTE You cannot have two internal storage devices of the same type. For example, you cannot have ...
- Figure 13.
- Storage device:CD drive,
- <TABLE>
- Table11. CD Drive Controls
- <TABLE HEADING>
- <TABLE BODY>
- NOTE The audio features of the CD drive are supported through applications only. One such applica...
- The optional
- Figure 14.
- Figure14. Floppy Drive Controls and Features
- <TABLE>
- Security Lock
- Rear Panel Connectors:
- Rear Panel Connectors:
- This section describes the following connectors on the system unit’s rear panel:
- This section describes the following connectors on the system unit’s rear panel:
- • Two serial ports (RS-232)
- • Two serial ports (RS-232)
- • Two serial ports (RS-232)
- • Two Universal Serial Bus ports (USB)
- • LAN connector, 10 BaseT/100 BaseT
- • HP parallel IEEE 1284 (printer) connector
- • Audio connectors (PCI based, line in, line out, headset, and microphone in)
- • Ultra2 Wide LVD (Low Voltage Differential) SCSI
- • Ultra Narrow Single-Ended (NSE) SCSI
- • TOC (transfer of control) button
- • AC power cord connector
- • Security loop
- NOTE To maintain FCC/EMI compliance, verify that all cables are fully seated and properly fastened.
- • Two serial ports (RS-232)
- Figure15. System Unit Rear Panel Connectors
- Rear Panel Connectors:audio connectors,
- Rear Panel Connectors:audio connectors,
- The Model B1000 and C3000 workstations have audio-input and -output capabilities through external...
- The rear panel contains the Audio IN (Stereo line-in) and Microphone (Mic-in), and Audio OUT (Ste...
- The audio connectors are standard stereo audio mini-jacks (see Figure 1-6).
- NOTE Hewlett-Packard recommends using gold-plated plugs available through audio retailers for bes...
- Figure16. Audio Connectors
- Table 13.
- <TABLE>
- USB:,
- Rear Panel Connectors:parallel,
- Rear Panel Connectors:network,
- Rear Panel Connectors:serial,
- Rear Panel Connectors:serial,
- There are a variety of peripheral devices that can attach to the RS-232 Serial Input/Output (SIO)...
- The SIO ports are programmable, allowing functions such as bit rate, character length, parity, an...
- Table 14.
- <TABLE>
- SCSI:connectors,
- Rear Panel Connectors:TOC,
- Rear Panel Connectors:power cord
- Rear Panel Connectors:security loop,
- Rear Panel Connectors:security loop,
- The security loop provides a means of locking the left side panel with a padlock or other locking...
- 1. Inspect left side panel for proper seating in the mainframe chassis.
- 1. Inspect left side panel for proper seating in the mainframe chassis.
- 2. Push in the retractable pin on the spring loaded square fastener.
- 3. Insert the locking device through the top and bottom holes of the square fastener.
- 4. Inspect after locking device is in place to assure that the retractable pin is captured in the...
- The internal components of the workstation is now secured. See
- NOTE A locking device is not supplied with the workstation; the customer must supply a lock to us...
- Figure17. Security Loop Operation
- Monitor:,
- Monitor:,
- The B1000/C3000 workstations support the following monitors:
- For information on the A4575A monitors, see:
- • HP A4575A Color Monitor CE Handbook
- The A4575A is a 19" high-range resolution, multi-mode color monitor for use on workstations and X...
- For information on the A4576A monitor, see:
- The A4576A is a 21" high-range resolution, multi-mode color monitor for use on workstations. The ...
- NOTE Note that the word “multi-sync” is used as a common word to refer to “multi-frequency” and/o...
- NOTE The connection to earlier HP monitors with 15-pin mini-DSub cables can be made using the A41...
- USB:support,
- USB:support,
- USB Keyboard
- USB Keyboard
- The HP Visualize B1000/C3000 workstations support USB keyboards. The keyboard shipped with the wo...
- The HP Visualize B1000/C3000 workstations support USB keyboards. The keyboard shipped with the wo...
- The USB keyboard is designed specifically for use with HP workstations. All keyboard models with ...
- Some applications may expect to use keycodes generated by keys existing on other types of keyboar...
- NOTE HIL and PS/2 devices are not supported by the B1000/C3000 workstations.
- USB HP Scroll Mouse
- HP Hub for USB Devices
- Operating System:overview,
- Operating System:overview,
- The B1000/C3000 workstation uses the HP-UX operating system, version 10.20 and the Workstation Ad...
- If you’re running HP-UX 11.0, the result from this command will be similar to this:
- Instant Ignition systems (systems with preloaded software) have X-Windows, Hewlett-Packard’s grap...
- If the Instant Ignition system does not have the kernel preconfigured with all of the device driv...
- For problems or questions with Instant Ignition, refer to
- Note that both of the documents mentioned in the previous paragraphs can be found at the followin...
- http://www.docs.hp.com/
- Memory:,
- 2 Configuration
- 2 Configuration
- This chapter provides details about setting up and changing the system configuration for the HP V...
- Chapter Overview
- Configuration:workstation,
- Configuration:FRU,
- Configuration:FRU,
- This section provides information for setting up or changing the configuration of the system Fiel...
- Internal Storage Configurations
- Internal Storage Configurations
- Configuration:hard disk drive,
- Configuration:hard disk drive,
- The SCSI IDs for hard disk drives are hard-wired into the SCA Ultra2 Wide LVD SCSI interfaces in ...
- NOTE There must ALWAYS be a terminator at both ends of a SCSI bus. This means one internal termin...
- Table 2-1 lists the default device IDs for internal storage devices. These IDs are the default ID...
- <TABLE>
- Figures 2-1 and 2-2 show the two types of hard disk drives supported for the B1000/C3000 workstat...
- Figure21. Hard Drive, 9Gbyte/18Gbyte Ultra2 Low Voltage Differential
- The hard disk drive in Figure 2-2 is used exclusively for the HP Visualize B1000 workstation.
- Figure22. 9Gbyte, 7200 RPM, Hard Disk Drive
- Configuration:hard disk drive:SAM,
- Configuration:hard disk drive:SAM,
- This section describes how to add a hard drive to your system as a file system using SAM. For mor...
- 1. Log in as
- 1. Log in as
- 2. Move the mouse pointer to the Application Manager control for tools and click the left mouse b...
- 3. Click twice on the
- 4. Click twice on the
- 5. Double click on the
- 6. Double click on the
- 7. Click on
- 8. Enter the mount directory name in the Mount Directory field of the Add Disk window and click o...
- Configuration:CD Drive,
- Configuration:CD Drive,
- The optional CD drive connects to the ATAPI (IDE) interface in the CD drive bay backplane within ...
- However, as shown in
- CAUTION CD-ROM drives are susceptible to mechanical and electrostatic shock. When handling the dr...
- Figure23. CD Drive Jumper Setting (Rear View)
- See the section titled
- Configuration:floppy disk drive,
- Configuration:memory,
- Configuration:memory,
- This workstation has 8 memory slots, labeled 0 through 7. Memory can be configured from 128MB to ...
- Figure24. Memory Connectors
- CAUTION The memory cards must be installed in the correct order, else the system will not boot pr...
- The B1000/C3000 workstation supports the 128 MByte DIMMs or the 256 MByte DIMMs. If users install...
- NOTE Users who wish to achieve both maximum performance and maximum future capacity are advised t...
- See the section titled
- Use the Boot Console Handler to verify that the workstation recognizes the installed memory. See
- Configuration:I/O cards,
- Configuration:I/O cards,
- There are six I/O slots located on the rear panel of the B1000 and C3000 workstations. Slots 1 th...
- Figure25. PCI Card Slot Numbering and Capabilities
- To maintain good graphics performance, you should always use slot 2 (SL2) as your primary graphic...
- NOTE If you connect your monitor to a different graphics card slot, you will need to change the g...
- See the section titled
- Monitor:
- Monitor:
- The B1000/C3000 supports the following monitors:
- The B1000/C3000 supports the following monitors:
- • 19-inch, 1280¥1024 color monitor, 75 Hz (A4575A)
- The
- Note that connection to earlier HP monitors with 15-pin mini-DSub cables can be made using the A4...
- Monitor:unsupported,
- NOTE The B1000/C3000 workstations support a maximum of four Visualize-EG graphics cards with four...
- 3 Troubleshooting
- 3 Troubleshooting
- This chapter provides information about isolating a failing component, known as a Field Replaceab...
- To troubleshoot a HP Visualize B1000/C3000 workstation, you must be familiar with the HP-UX opera...
- As a super-user who is troubleshooting a HP-UX system, you should be able to shutdown and reboot ...
- Note any error or status messages, then run the power-up boot ROM diagnostics, known as Self Test...
- For a complete description of using
- http://wojo.rose.hp.com/
- troubleshooting:
- troubleshooting:
- The following four figures contain troubleshooting flowcharts you can follow to isolate a failing...
- Figure31. Power On LCD, Troubleshooting Flow
- troubleshooting:console,
- troubleshooting:bootable device,
- troubleshooting:HP-UX Boot,
- troubleshooting:LCD,
- troubleshooting:LCD,
- This workstation uses an LCD panel to display firmware/OS progress codes. the codes, referred to ...
- FLT A hardware error has been detected
- TST Hardware being tested
- SHU System being shutdown
- INI Hardware being initialized
- WRN A non-optimal operating condition exists
- RUN Computer is running operating system
- In general, the LCD display has the following format:
- <GRAPHIC>
- ZZZ Three character chassis code
- YYYY Four digit hexadecimal code
- FFFFFF Six character field replaceable unit description
- WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW Description of the chassis code
- If the system encounters an
- FLT
- 30FC
- SYS BD
- bad sys bd id
- troubleshooting:fan failures and warnings,
- troubleshooting:fan failures and warnings,
- This section provides the failure and warning messages you will see in the LCD if there is a prob...
- <TABLE>
- Here is an example of a failure message for the I/O (PCI card) fan:
- <TABLE>
- Here is an example of a warning message for the Turbo Cooler Fan, CPU:
- To locate the correct fan, see
- Figure35. Fan Locations
- In the case of a fan problem, you will need to replace:
- • The fan itself, if it is either a system board cooling fan, PCI (I/O) fan, or a memory fan.
- See
- troubleshooting:boot failure,
- troubleshooting:boot failure,
- To start this workstation from an operating system stored on a device different from the usual bo...
- troubleshooting:bootable media,
- troubleshooting:bootable media,
- To list all devices that may contain bootable media, go to the Main Menu of the Boot Console Inte...
- To list all devices that may contain bootable media, go to the Main Menu of the Boot Console Inte...
- Main Menu: Enter a command or a menu > search ipl
- The search may turn up more devices than there are lines on the display. If using a text terminal...
- • To hold the display temporarily, press
- These flow-control commands do not work with a bitmapped display, but such a display can show mor...
- To search for devices of just one type that actually contain bootable media, go to the Main Menu ...
- Main Menu: Enter a command > search ipl device_type
- where
- • fwscsi
- Stable Storage
- boot command:notations,
- Supported Boot Paths
- ISL:environment,
- ISL:environment,
- The ISL environment provides the means to load the operating system (HP-UX) environment. The ISL ...
- • Execute user-entered commands to modify boot device paths and boot options in stable storage.
- The ISL program provides a stand-alone environment for loading off-line diagnostic and utility pr...
- troubleshooting:selftest failures,
- troubleshooting:selftest failures,
- Chassis codes are the key to debugging selftest errors. If a failure is found during selftest, ch...
- troubleshooting:chassis codes,
- troubleshooting:chassis codes,
- Table 32.
- <TABLE>
- Table32. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
- <TABLE HEADING>
- <TABLE BODY>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- Memory Failures
- troubleshooting:system verification tests,
- troubleshooting:system verification tests,
- HP-UX uses an on-line diagnostics product named Mesa (Support Tools Manager) that allows system o...
- HP-UX uses an on-line diagnostics product named Mesa (Support Tools Manager) that allows system o...
- Three interfaces are available with the Support Tools Manager:
- • a command line interface (accessed through the
- For more information on these user interfaces, see the on-line man pages by entering the followin...
- man cstm
- man xstm
- For information on the enhanced on-line diagnostics, see the enhanced on-line diagnostics, see the
- To access the Support Tools Manager, perform the following steps:
- 1. In a terminal window, type the following at the # prompt to invoke the command line interface:
- 1. In a terminal window, type the following at the # prompt to invoke the command line interface:
- 2. The following message appears:
- 3. To verify the system operation, type the following at the
- 4. Press
- 5. To exit the Support Tools Manager, enter the following:
- If any tests failed, run Self Test and ISL diagnostics to isolate the problem.
- troubleshooting:ODE,
- troubleshooting:ODE,
- The Offline Diagnostic Environment (ODE) consists of diagnostic modules for testing and verifying...
- ODE is an ISL utility. To boot ODE:
- Not all of the test modules are available on all systems. To see what test modules are available ...
- • wdiag
- For further information on the various ODE commands and a complete listing of the command set, type
- FRU:,
- FRU:,
- This chapter lists the HP Visualize B1000/C3000 Workstation Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and pr...
- WARNING For all removal and replacement procedures in this chapter, you must power off the workst...
- NOTE To maintain FCC/EMI compliance, verify that all covers are replaced and that all screws are ...
- Use the following tools to remove or replace FRUs:
- • Torx T-10 driver
- NOTE To maintain FCC/EMI compliance, verify that all covers are replaced and that all gasket mate...
- Figure 41.
- Refer to this figure for the locations of the various workstation FRUs while performing the FRU r...
- B1000/C3000:main components,
- Figure42. CD Drive Bracket Assembly
- Figure 42.
- Figure43. Floppy Drive Bracket Assembly
- Figure 43.
- Figure44. Hard Disk Drive Bracket Assembly
- Figure 4-4 shows the Hard Disk Drive Bracket Assembly FRUs for the B1000/C3000 workstation.
- FRU:exchange and non-exchange,
- FRU:exchange and non-exchange,
- In this chapter we refer to exchange and non-exchange part numbers.
- You must return FRUs with exchange part numbers in exchange for a replacement FRU. Do
- Each of the B1000/C3000 workstation exploded views show field replaceable units. Table 4-1 lists ...
- FRUs Part Numbers
- FRUs Part Numbers
- <TABLE>
- <TABLE>
- Table42. Non-exchange Parts FRU List
- <TABLE HEADING>
- <TABLE BODY>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- <TABLE ROW>
- FRU:removal and replacement,
- FRU:removal and replacement,
- The procedures in this section describe how to remove field replaceable units (FRUs). Observe any...
- Before performing these procedures, observe the following precautions:
- Step 1. Power off the system, the monitor, and any peripheral devices.
- Step 1. Power off the system, the monitor, and any peripheral devices.
- Step 2. Unplug the workstation power cord and the power cord of any peripheral devices from AC wa...
- Step 3. Unplug the system unit power cord from the AC input connector.
- Step 4. Disconnect any external cables from the connectors on the front and rear of the system unit.
- Step 5. Attach a static-grounding wrist strap to your wrist and a location on the system chassis ...
- Step 6. Lay the workstation on a flat stable surface, such as a table top or floor. To protect ag...
- Step 7. If installed, remove any locking device from the security loop on the rear of the system ...
- front panel:
- front panel:
- This section describes how to open and close the workstation front panel.
- Opening the System Unit Front Panel
- Opening the System Unit Front Panel
- Perform the following steps to open the system unit.
- 1. Power off the workstation, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
- 1. Power off the workstation, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
- 2. Attach the static-grounding wrist strap by following the instructions on the package. Attach t...
- 3. Unlock the front panel (also known as the front bezel) by pressing in on the two latch buttons...
- 4. Swing the panel clockwise on its left snap hinges until the panel comes free and place the fro...
- Closing the System Unit Front Panel
- Closing the System Unit Front Panel
- Perform the following steps to close the system unit.
- 1. Locate the snap hinges on the left side of the front panel, and insert them into the holes loc...
- Left Side Panel of the System Unit
- Left Side Panel of the System Unit
- This section explains how to open and close the left side panel of the system unit. This side pan...
- Opening the Left Side Panel of the System Unit
- Opening the Left Side Panel of the System Unit
- Perform these steps to open the left side panel.
- safety interlock switch:warning,
- 1. Turn the computer around so the rear is facing you. On the right edge of the computer, there a...
- NOTE The EMI gasket, as shown in Figure 4-6, must not be removed from the side panel.
- Closing the Left Side Panel of the System Unit
- Closing the Left Side Panel of the System Unit
- Perform these steps to close the left side panel.
- NOTE Power supply thumbscrews must be fully tightened before closing the left side panel. Failure...
- 1. Hold the left side panel so that the hook hinges can be inserted into their hinge slots. See F...
- 1. Hold the left side panel so that the hook hinges can be inserted into their hinge slots. See F...
- 2. Swing the back edge of the panel toward the system unit’s back edge and press the outside edge...
- 3. Secure the side panel in place by screwing the top and bottom slotted T-15 Torx thumb screws i...
- FRU:power supply,
- FRU:power supply,
- This section will prove important to you as you begin to service the system. For example, you may...
- WARNING To prevent injury, unplug the workstation power cord from the electrical outlet before se...
- The topics covered in this section are:
- • Propping up the Power Supply
- Propping Up the Power Supply
- Propping Up the Power Supply
- To prop the power supply up, follow these steps:
- 1. Lay the system on its side on a cushioned surface to protect against damage to the exterior wo...
- 1. Lay the system on its side on a cushioned surface to protect against damage to the exterior wo...
- 2. Open the left side panel of the system unit by following the procedure in the section “Opening...
- 3. Unscrew the two screws on the power supply chassis as shown in
- 4. Lift up on the power supply handle. The power supply bail automatically engages once the power...
- Closing the System
- Closing the System
- Once you have completed the task you set out to perform, you are ready to close the system. To cl...
- 1. Push slightly back on the power supply until you are able to remove the bail from the bail loc...
- Removing the Power Supply
- Removing the Power Supply
- To remove the power supply follow these steps:
- 1. Follow the steps covered in the section “Propping Up the Power Supply.”
- 1. Follow the steps covered in the section “Propping Up the Power Supply.”
- 2. Disconnect both power cables from the system board, the control cable, and the power cable for...
- 3. Remove the bail from the bail lock. See Figure 4-10.
- 4. Grasp the power supply by the handle and slide the spring hinge lever to the right and rotate ...
- Closing the System
- FRU:I/O cards,
- FRU:I/O cards,
- The B1000 and C3000 computer’s PCI assembly has six slots. Slots 5 and 6 are half-size Peripheral...
- Figure411. PCI Card Slot Numbering and Capabilities
- NOTE To maintain good graphics performance, you should always use slot 2 (SL2) as the primary gra...
- The six I/O slots as seen from the back of the computer are labeled from top to bottom starting w...
- I/O slot:numbering,
- Removing I/O Cards
- Removing I/O Cards
- This section assumes that you already have I/O cards loaded in the system unit, and you would lik...
- 1. Open the side panel of the system unit as explained in the section “Opening the Left Side Pane...
- 1. Open the side panel of the system unit as explained in the section “Opening the Left Side Pane...
- 2. Pull evenly in the direction of the arrow on both sides of the I/O card retainer to remove it....
- 3. Locate the I/O card you want to remove and using a T-15 Torx driver or flat blade screw driver...
- 4. Pull evenly on the outside edges of the I/O card to remove it.
- Installing I/O Cards
- Installing I/O Cards
- To install a new I/O card, do the following:
- NOTE Slots two and four are the graphics card slots. The primary graphics card slot is slot numbe...
- 1. Open the left side panel of the system unit as explained in the section “Opening the Left Side...
- 1. Open the left side panel of the system unit as explained in the section “Opening the Left Side...
- 2. Locate the appropriate slot for the I/O card that is to be installed. See Figure 4-12.
- 3. Unscrew the T-15 Torx screw from the bulkhead blank of the slot you have chosen. If no blank i...
- 4. Pull evenly in the direction of the arrow on both sides of the I/O card retainer to remove it....
- 5. Insert the I/O card into the slot you have chosen with the bulkhead appropriately positioned. ...
- 6. Replace the I/O card retainer by placing the bottom retainer clip in the slot on the air divid...
- 7. Close the left side panel of the system unit by following the procedure in the section “Closin...
- FRU:fans,
- FRU:fans,
- The B1000/C3000 has five fans that are used to cool various areas within the unit. If one of thes...
- • Removing the fan from the hard disk drive area
- Figure415. Fan Cooling Areas for the System Unit
- FRU:hard disk drive fan,
- FRU:hard disk drive fan,
- This section provides the procedure for removing the cooling fan from the back of the hard disk d...
- • SCA disk interface board
- Here are the steps necessary for removing the fan from the hard disk drive chassis.
- 1. Remove the system unit’s side panel. See the section “Opening the Left Side Panel of the Syste...
- 1. Remove the system unit’s side panel. See the section “Opening the Left Side Panel of the Syste...
- 2. Lay the system unit on its right side (determined by facing the workstation front panel), and ...
- 3. Unplug the fan power cable from the system board. If you are removing the hard disk drive fan ...
- 4. Lift up on the handle of the fan bracket to remove the fan. See Figure 4-16. As you lift up on...
- FRU:system fans,
- FRU:system fans,
- This section provides the procedure for removing the cooling fans from the CPU area of the system...
- Here are the steps necessary for removing the fans from the CPU area of the system unit’s chassis.
- 1. Remove the system units left side panel. See the section “Opening the Left Side Panel of the S...
- 1. Remove the system units left side panel. See the section “Opening the Left Side Panel of the S...
- 2. Lay the system unit on its right side (determined by facing the system units front panel), and...
- 3. Unplug the power cables for the fans as shown in
- 4. Remove the plastic mounting rivets that hold the fans in place. See Figure 4-17. To remove the...
- Note that you can replace the fans using the original rivets; however, the plastic rivets will be...
- Installing the Fans for the CPU Area
- Installing the Fans for the CPU Area
- To replace the system board fans, do the following:
- Installing the Bottom Fan
- Installing the Bottom Fan
- 1. Position the bottom fan so its power cable channel is against the system unit chassis, and the...
- 1. Position the bottom fan so its power cable channel is against the system unit chassis, and the...
- 2. Slide the lower left corner of the fan into the fan support. See
- 3. Line up the rivet holes of the fan with the rivet holes of the system unit chassis.
- 4. Press the plastic rivets into place. See
- 5. Plug the fan power cable into its connector on the system board. See
- Installing the Top Fan
- Installing the Top Fan
- 1. Position the top fan so its power cable channel is up against the workstation chassis, and the...
- 1. Position the top fan so its power cable channel is up against the workstation chassis, and the...
- 2. Line up the rivet holes of the fan with the rivet holes of the system unit chassis.
- 3. Press the plastic rivets into place. See
- 4. Plug the fan power cable into its connector on the system board. See
- FRU:I/O fan,
- FRU:I/O fan,
- The I/O area of the system unit has its own cooling fan. Note that there is a speaker attached to...
- To remove the I/O cooling fan or
- 1. Remove the workstation left side panel. See the section “Opening the Left Side Panel of the Sy...
- 1. Remove the workstation left side panel. See the section “Opening the Left Side Panel of the Sy...
- 2. Lay the workstation on its side, and remove all of the I/O cards. See the section “Removing I/...
- 3. Remove the system unit air divider as shown in Figure 4-19 by unscrewing the two T-15 Torx scr...
- 4. Remove the fan and speaker cables from the system board and lift up on the bracket mounting cl...
- 5. To remove the speaker from the mounting bracket, push a finger through the access hole and spr...
- 6. Remove the fan from the bracket by slightly pulling the left and right fan mounting clips away...
- Installing a Fan or Speaker in the I/O Card Area
- Installing a Fan or Speaker in the I/O Card Area
- If you are replacing a fan or speaker in the I/O card area, follow the steps covered in this sect...
- 1. Remove the fan or speaker from the I/O card area by following the procedure in the section “Re...
- 1. Remove the fan or speaker from the I/O card area by following the procedure in the section “Re...
- 2. Install the fan by positioning the fan power cable channel so that it is located in the lower ...
- 3. Install the speaker by positioning it so that the speaker cable can be easily run out of the h...
- 4. Replace the fan/speaker bracket in the chassis by inserting the bottom and in first between th...
- 5. Position the fan power cable, speaker cable and LCD ribbon cable so that they run along the sy...
- 6. Place the air divider into its proper position as shown in
- 7. Replace all I/O cards into their proper slots as explained in the section “I/O Cards” in this ...
- 8. Close the system unit as discussed in the section “Closing the System Unit” in this chapter.
- FRU:removable media,
- FRU:removable media,
- There are only two removable media devices allowed in a B1000/C3000 computer:
- • CD Drive
- The procedures provided in the subsequent sections explain how to install and remove media devices.
- FRU:CD drive,
- FRU:CD drive,
- Install the CD drive by following the procedure covered in this section.
- WARNING Turn the workstation off and unplug the power cord before installing the CD drive.
- Note you will have to verify that the master/slave/CSEL jumper is set in the CSEL position. Since...
- CAUTION CD drives are susceptible to mechanical and electronic shock. When handling the drive, al...
- 1. Perform the procedures in the sections “Opening the System Unit Front Panel” and “Opening the ...
- 1. Perform the procedures in the sections “Opening the System Unit Front Panel” and “Opening the ...
- 2. Remove the CD Drive rear cover by unscrewing the T-15 Torx screw as shown in Figure 4-22. Note...
- 3. Rotate the system unit around until you see the front of the unit as shown in
- 4. Remove both CD Drive bracket screws (T-15 Torx screws) and pull the CD Drive bracket out of th...
- 5. Read the CAUTION statement at the beginning of this section. Next remove the CD Drive from its...
- 6. Slide the CD Drive and its bracket into the system unit chassis as shown in Figure 4-25. There...
- 7. Tighten the two CD Drive bracket screws as shown in Figure 4-26.
- 8. Plug the ATAPI and power cables into their appropriate connectors. Note that the connectors ar...
- 9. Make sure that the ATAPI and power cables are positioned so that they come out of the bottom e...
- 10. Complete the installation of the CD Drive by replacing the front and side panels of the syste...
- Removing a CD Drive
- Removing a CD Drive
- This section explains how to remove a CD Drive from you system unit.
- CAUTION CD Drives are susceptible to mechanical and electronic shock. When handling the drive, al...
- 1. Perform the procedures in the sections “Opening the System Unit Front Panel” and “Opening the ...
- 1. Perform the procedures in the sections “Opening the System Unit Front Panel” and “Opening the ...
- 2. Remove the CD Drive rear disk cover by unscrewing the T-15 Torx screw as shown in
- 3. Rotate the system unit around until you see the front of the unit as shown in Figure 4-30.
- 4. Remove both CD Drive bracket screws (T-15 Torx screws) and pull the CD Drive out of the chassi...
- 5. Insert the CD Drive blank in the CD Drive bracket and tighten the four CD Drive mounting screw...
- 6. Tighten the two CD Drive bracket screws as shown in Figure 4-33.
- 7. Place the ATAPI cable and power cables inside the CD Drive chassis, and position the cables so...
- FRU:floppy disk drive,
- FRU:floppy disk drive,
- Install the floppy disk drive by following the procedure covered in this section. Note there are ...
- WARNING Turn the workstation off and unplug the power cord before installing the floppy disk drive.
- CAUTION Floppy disk drives are susceptible to mechanical and electronic shock. When handling the ...
- 1. Perform the procedures in the sections “Opening the System Unit Front Panel” and “Opening the ...
- 1. Perform the procedures in the sections “Opening the System Unit Front Panel” and “Opening the ...
- 2. Remove the floppy rear-disk cover by unscrewing the T-15 Torx screw as shown in
- 3. Rotate the system unit around until you see the front of the workstation as shown in
- 4. Remove both floppy disk bracket screws (T-15 Torx screws) and pull the floppy disk bracket out...
- 5. Read the CAUTION statement at the beginning of this section. Next remove the floppy disk drive...
- 6. Slide the floppy disk and its bracket into the system unit chassis as shown in
- 7. Tighten the two floppy bracket screws as shown in
- 8. Plug the data and power cables into their appropriate connectors. Note that the connectors are...
- 9. Verify that the data and power cables are positioned to come out of the top edge of the rear f...
- 10. Complete the installation of the floppy disk drive by replacing the front and side panels of ...
- Removing a Floppy Disk Drive
- Removing a Floppy Disk Drive
- 1. Perform the procedures in the sections “Opening the System Unit Front Panel” and “Opening the ...
- 1. Perform the procedures in the sections “Opening the System Unit Front Panel” and “Opening the ...
- 2. Remove the floppy rear disk cover by unscrewing the T-15 Torx screw as shown in
- 3. Rotate the workstation around until you can see the front of the unit as shown in
- 4. Remove both floppy disk bracket screws (T-15 torx screws) and pull the floppy disk drive out o...
- 5. Place the floppy disk blank in the floppy disk bracket and insert the four floppy disk mountin...
- 6. Slide the floppy disk blank and its bracket into the system unit chassis as shown in
- 7. Tighten the two floppy disk bracket screws as shown in
- 8. Inspect and verify that the data and power cables are positioned to come out of the top edge o...
- 9. Complete the installation of the floppy disk drive by replacing the front and side panels of t...
- FRU:hard disk drive,
- FRU:hard disk drive,
- This section describes installation and removal of hard disk drives in the B1000/C3000 workstatio...
- NOTE Do not use SCSI ID 7 for any of the internal or external disk drives. The host SCSI controll...
- hard disk drive:
- hard disk drive:
- NOTE If you are installing a new hard disk drive, the slotted pan screws for attaching the drive ...
- 1. Open the front panel of the workstation, refer to the section “Opening the System Unit Front P...
- 1. Open the front panel of the workstation, refer to the section “Opening the System Unit Front P...
- 2. Open the hard drive slot by pressing the plastic release hook upward and pulling outward on th...
- 3. Mount the hard disk drive on the hard drive bracket using the four T-10 torx screws and rubber...
- Removing a Hard Disk Drive
- Removing a Hard Disk Drive
- This procedure explains how to remove the hard disk drive. Note that there are no cables for you ...
- 1. Open the front panel of the system using the instructions found in the section “Opening the Sy...
- 1. Open the front panel of the system using the instructions found in the section “Opening the Sy...
- 2. Open the hard drive slot by pressing the plastic release hook upward and pulling outward on th...
- 3. Remove the four T-15 Torx screws from the hard disk drive bracket. See
- 4. Slide the assembly into its hard drive slot, and push inward on the release lever until the fr...
- FRU:DIMM cards,
- FRU:DIMM cards,
- This section contains information regarding the installation and removal of memory (DIMM cards). ...
- • Use the procedure described in
- • Use the procedure described in
- • Review the steps involved in installing memory DIMMs before you begin.
- • Insert DIMMs in the order shown. Please refer to
- • Note the proper orientation for DIMMs when inserting them into their connectors because the con...
- • Use the “Boot Console Handler” to verify that the computer recognizes the additional DIMMs when...
- Installing Additional Memory
- Installing Additional Memory
- Perform the following steps to add memory (DIMM cards) to the workstation.
- 1. Open the side panel of the system unit as explained in the section “Opening the Left Side Pane...
- 1. Open the side panel of the system unit as explained in the section “Opening the Left Side Pane...
- 2. Lay the system on its side as shown in
- 3. Prop up the system unit power supply as explained in the section “Propping Up the System Unit ...
- 4. For ease in installation of additional memory the hard disk drive fan may need to be removed. ...
- 5. Load the DIMM cards in the slots using the loading sequence provided in
- 6. Press downward on the ejector tabs located on both sides of the DIMM connector. See
- 7. Place the DIMM card in the connector, lining it up with the guides. Make sure to put the notch...
- 8. Close the ejector tab.
- 9. Press firmly and evenly on the DIMM card to ensure that it seats properly. The ejector tabs en...
- 10. Replace the power supply and workstation left side panel. You may now plug the power cord bac...
- 11. Verify that this installation was successful by following the steps in Chapter 6, “The Boot C...
- Once you have completed the steps listed above, the DIMM cards are properly loaded.
- FRU:memory:removing,
- FRU:memory:removing,
- Perform the following steps to remove memory (DIMM cards) from the system unit.
- 1. Open the side panel of the system unit as explained in the section “Opening the Left Side Pane...
- 1. Open the side panel of the system unit as explained in the section “Opening the Left Side Pane...
- 2. Lay the system on its side as shown in
- 3. Prop up the system unit power supply as explained in the section “Propping Up the System Unit ...
- 4. For ease in removing memory cards, remove the fan from the hard disk drive chassis. See the se...
- 5. Press downward on the ejector tabs located on both sides of the DIMM connector. See
- 6. Lift up evenly on the outside edges of the DIMM card. See
- 7. Replace the power supply and system unit side panel. You may now plug the power cord back into...
- 8. Verify that the removal was successful by following the steps in Chapter 6, “Boot Console Hand...
- FRU:LCD,
- FRU:LCD,
- This section describes how to remove and replace the B1000/C3000 workstation power switch/LCD ass...
- Removing the System Unit LCD
- Removing the System Unit LCD
- To remove the LCD assembly, perform the following steps:
- 1. Open the system unit’s front panel as shown in the section “Opening the System Unit Front Panel.”
- Replacing the
- Replacing the
- To replace the power switch/LCD assembly, do the following:
- 1. Open the system unit’s front panel as shown in the section “Opening the System Unit Front Panel.”
- 1. Open the system unit’s front panel as shown in the section “Opening the System Unit Front Panel.”
- 2. Insert the LCD’s left-side mounting clips into the slots shown on the system unit chassis. See
- 3. Plug in the LCD connector as shown in Figure 4-60.
- 4. Replace the system unit’s front panel. This completes the installation of the system LCD assem...
- FRU:system board,
- FRU:system board,
- The system board contains the I/O section, computer main memory, CPU, and all of the circuitry an...
- Removing the
- Removing the
- To remove the system board tray assembly, do the following:
- 1. Remove the left side panel as explained in the section “Opening the Left Side Panel of the Sys...
- 1. Remove the left side panel as explained in the section “Opening the Left Side Panel of the Sys...
- 2. Remove the two T-15 Torx screws that secure the system board tray assembly to the rear panel o...
- 3. Remove the system unit power supply as covered in the section “System Unit Power Supply” in th...
- 4. Remove the hard disk drive fan as described in the section “Removing the Fan from the Hard Dis...
- 5. Remove the DIMM cards as explained in the section “Removing Memory” in this chapter.
- 6. Remove the PCI retainer, the I/O cards from their PCI slots and the air divider as covered ear...
- 7. Unplug the following cables from the system board:
- 7. Unplug the following cables from the system board:
- a. Floppy disk drive data cable
- Figure461. Removing the System Board
- 8. Fold back the workstation cables to avoid interference or damage.
- 9. Grasp the system board tray handle and slide the system board to the front of the workstation....
- FRU:system board:installation,
- FRU:system board:installation,
- To install the system board perform the following steps:
- 1. Angle the system board assembly diagonally as you begin installation. Position the system boar...
- FRU:battery,
- FRU:battery,
- The battery in the B1000/C3000 workstation is contained within the real time clock module, part n...
- 1. Close all open applications on the workstation then use the power button on the front panel to...
- 1. Close all open applications on the workstation then use the power button on the front panel to...
- 2. Unplug the power cord from the workstation to disconnect all AC power. Remove the workstation ...
- 3. Remove the two captive screws for the power supply shown in
- 4. Carefully remove the defective real time clock module. Note the polarity dot which is silk-scr...
- 4. Carefully remove the defective real time clock module. Note the polarity dot which is silk-scr...
- CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equ...
- CAUTION Il y a danger d´explosion s´il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniqu...
- 5. Insert the
- 6. Reconnect the 6-pin power supply cable to the system board. Push back slightly on the power su...
- 7. Replace the left side panel of the system unit as shown in the section “Closing the left Side ...
- 8. The B1000/C3000 workstation is now ready to reboot with the operational battery.
- Diagrams:
- Diagrams:
- This chapter provides functional information about the B1000/C3000 workstations. The following bl...
- Diagrams:system power,
- 6 Boot Console Handler
- 6 Boot Console Handler
- This chapter explains how to use the Boot Console Handler, which provides an interactive environm...
- Here are the topics covered in this chapter:
- • Boot Console Handler Features
- • Boot Console Handler Features
- • Accessing the Boot Console Handler
- • Booting the Workstation
- • Searching for Bootable Media
- • Resetting the Workstation
- • Displaying and Setting Paths
- • Displaying and Setting the Monitor type
- • Changing the Console to an External Terminal
- • Displaying the Current Memory Configuration
- • Display the Status of the System I/O
- • Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search
- • Displaying and Setting the Security Mode
- • Displaying and setting the Fastboot
- • Displaying the LAN station address
- • Displaying System Information
- • Displaying PIM information
- Boot Console Handler:features,
- Boot Console Handler:features,
- There are times when you want to interact directly with the hardware of your computer before it b...
- Here are some of the things you can do:
- • Boot your computer
- • Boot your computer
- • Search for bootable media
- • Reset your computer
- • Display and set boot paths
- • Display and set your monitor type
- • Display memory configuration information
- • Display the status of the PCI slots
- • Set Auto Boot, Auto Search, and Auto Start
- • Set Fastboot
- • Display LAN information
- • Display system information
- The boot console menus follow, showing the various tasks you can perform and the available inform...
- The shortened version of all commands is indicated by the uppercase letters.
- Boot Console Handler:help,
- Boot Console Handler:accessing,
- Boot Console Handler:accessing,
- If the workstation has crashed or power was turned off for some reason, press the power switch an...
- 1. Close any files and applications on your computer.
- 1. Close any files and applications on your computer.
- 2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the workstation.
- 3. Power on the workstation after it has completely shut down. If
- 4. Press a key. You will then see the message:
- Boot Console Handler:menus,
- Boot Console Handler:menus,
- The boot console menus follow, showing the various tasks you can perform and the available inform...
- The shortened version of all commands is indicated by the uppercase letters.
- Help is available for all the menus and commands by typing either help, he or ? and the menu or c...
- Boot Console Handler:main menu,
- ---------------- Main Menu ------------------------------------------------
- Command Description
- ---------------------------------------------
- BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path PAth [PRI|ALT|CON|KEY|[<path>] ...
- COnfiguration [<command>] Access Configuration menu/commands INformation [<command>]...
- DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<commands>]...
- ------------- Main Menu: Enter command >
- BOot [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command DIsplay...
- ----- Configuration Menu: Enter command >
- -------------
- ------ Information Menu: Enter command >
- PIM [<proc> [HPMC|LPMC|TOC]]Display PIM information ScRoll [ON|OFF] Display or ch...
- BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>]Boot from specified path DIsplayRedisplay th...
- ----- Service Menu: Enter command >
- Boot Console Handler:booting the workstation,
- Boot Console Handler:booting the workstation,
- In general the B1000/C3000 workstation is started by the power switch and HP-UX boots automatical...
- For example, you may want to start the workstation from an operating system that is stored on a d...
- Here are some possible booting scenarios you may encounter:
- • If you know which device you want to boot from, and you know that it contains a bootable operat...
- • If you know which device you want to boot from, and you know that it contains a bootable operat...
- • If you do not know which device you want to boot from, then type the following at the prompt a...
- • If you do not know which device you want to boot from, then type the following at the prompt a...
- A message similar to the following will be displayed:
- Path Number Device Path Device Type
- ---------------------------------------------
- P0IDETEAC CD-532E-B
- P1FWSCSI.6.0SEAGATE ST39102LC
- At the prompt, you might type the following and press
- Note that the operating system on the specified device (
- • If you wish to interact with the Initial System Loader (ISL) before booting the workstation, fo...
- • If you do not know which media in your file systems have bootable operating systems, you can fi...
- Boot Console Handler:bootable media search,
- Boot Console Handler:bootable media search,
- To list devices that contain bootable media, follow the directions in “Accessing the Boot Console...
- Main Menu: Enter command > search ipl
- The search command searches all buses. The search may turn up more devices than there are lines o...
- • To hold the display temporarily, press Ctrl S
- These flow-control commands do not work with a bit-mapped display, but such a display can show mo...
- To search for devices of just one type that actually contain bootable media, follow the direction...
- Main Menu: Enter command> search ipl device_type
- Where
- •
- •
- •
- •
- •
- For more information about the
- Main Menu: Enter command> help search
- Boot Console Handler:default values,
- Boot Console Handler:displaying and setting paths,
- Boot Console Handler:displaying and setting paths,
- A path is the hardware address of a device that is attached to the I/O system of your workstation...
- <TABLE>
- To display the current settings for the system paths, type the following at the prompt and press
- The paths are displayed in Mnemonic Style Notation, as shown in
- <TABLE>
- To display the current setting for a particular system path, follow the directions in “Accessing ...
- where
- For example, to get the path to the primary boot device, follow the directions in “Accessing Boot...
- To set a system path to a new value, follow the directions in “Accessing the Boot Console Handler...
- where
- Boot Console Handler:monitor type,
- Boot Console Handler:monitor type,
- The workstation ships from the factory preset to use a monitor with a specific resolution and fre...
- The
- The
- The
- NOTE The monitor command lets you change your workstation’s graphics configuration before you rep...
- To display the current graphics and console information, enter the following command:
- The correct usage for setting the graphics configurations is:
- where valid graphics_path parameters are:
- and type is the numerical monitor type as shown with the monitor list command. See
- NOTE No space/blank characters may be used in the
- Displaying the Current
- Displaying the Current
- To display the current monitor configuration for your system from the Configuration Menu of the B...
- This places you in the Configuration Menu. From here, type the following command at the prompt an...
- The screen displays a list of the current graphics adapters and their monitor types configured fo...
- MONITOR INFORMATION
- ------- ----- ---------- ---------- ----- ---- -------
- GRAPHICS(2)
- Configuration Menu: Enter command>
- In this example, only the graphics adapter,
- Setting the
- Setting the
- You can set the monitor type for a graphics adapter by typing the following at the prompt and pre...
- Where n is the number of the graphics adapter and tt is the monitor type. To display a list of su...
- A list of valid monitor types similar to the following is displayed:
- MONITOR INFORMATION PathSlotHeadTypeSizeFreqClass ------------------...
- To set the monitor type for
- This will take effect on the next reboot.
- MONITOR INFORMATION
- ----- ----- ----------- ----------- ------ --- -------
- GRAPHICS(2)
- Configuration Menu: Enter command>
- The boot console may display a message that tells you that your new monitor selection will take e...
- Trying to change the monitor type to a number not listed for that graphics device fails and gives...
- Value of monitor type n out of range (n - nn)
- Trying to change the monitor type on an empty slot fails and gives you the following warning mess...
- Setting the Monitor Type at Power On
- Setting the Monitor Type at Power On
- If you replace your workstation’s monitor with a different monitor type, you need to let the comp...
- Once you have rebooted the system by turning it off, wait for a short time for the hard disk driv...
- NOTE It takes approximately one to two minutes after powering on the workstation before the
- Wait two seconds after the
- MONITOR INFORMATION
- ------ ------ --------- ------- ----- -------
- GRAPHICS(2)
- Press[RETURN]to select this monitor type(type n of n types)
- Note that if you do not select this monitor type, the system cycles through all of the available ...
- Once you have made your monitor type selection, the system queries you to confirm your selection....
- If you press any key other than
- At this point, the new monitor type is active, but not saved. Because you didn’t save the monitor...
- Next, the following message is displayed:
- To restart the monitor selection process, press
- Boot Console Handler:monitor problems,
- Boot Console Handler:monitor problems,
- In the event that your console stops displaying to your graphics device, use the following proced...
- 1. Turn the workstation power off.
- 1. Turn the workstation power off.
- 2. Disconnect the USB keyboard connector from the rear panel.
- 3. Connect a serial terminal emulator to the Serial 1 connector (the left serial connector) on th...
- 4. Power on the system. The system will now display the console to the terminal connected to Seri...
- 5. Set the monitor type and path using the Boot Console Handler. For information, reference the s...
- Boot Console Handler:memory configuration,
- Boot Console Handler:memory configuration,
- The following sample screen output uses the
- To display the current memory configuration for you system, from the Information Menu of the boot...
- Memory:information sample,
- Memory:information sample,
- The following sample shows the memory information when memory modules are properly installed and ...
- MEMORY INFORMATION MEMORY STATUS TABLE SlotSizeStatus ------------- ---...
- MEMORY FAULT TABLE
- Active, Installed Memory: 640MB of SDRAM
- Deallocated Pages : 0 Pages
- ...
- Available Memory : 640 MB
- Good Memory Required by OS : 0 (not initialized)
- Memory
- -------- ---------
- Boot Console Handler:I/O slot status,
- Boot Console Handler:auto boot and auto search,
- Boot Console Handler:auto boot and auto search,
- The
- The
- To examine the state of the
- If
- The state of the
- To change the state of the auto boot or auto search flags, type the following at the prompt and p...
- or
- where
- Auto search
- Primary Boot Path (can be set by the user)
- Alternate Boot Path (can be set by the user)
- Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI (built-in)
- PCI 1 through PCI 6 (plug-in interface cards)
- Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI (built-in)
- LAN (built-in)
- Boot Console Handler:security mode,
- Boot Console Handler:fastboot mode,
- Boot Console Handler:LAN station address,
- Boot Console Handler:LAN station address,
- It is sometimes necessary to supply the LAN station address of the workstation to other users. Fo...
- It is sometimes necessary to supply the LAN station address of the workstation to other users. Fo...
- A LAN station address for the workstation is the label that uniquely identifies the LAN connectio...
- To display the workstation’s LAN station address, type the following at the prompt and press
- The LAN station address is displayed as a twelve-digit number in hexadecimal notation, similar to...
- The address is for the workstation’s built-in LAN interface.
- Boot Console Handler:system information,
- Boot Console Handler:PIM,
- Stable Storage
- Boot Console Handler:ISL,
- Boot Console Handler:ISL,
- The ISL environment provides the means to load the operating system (HP-UX) environment. The ISL ...
- The ISL program is the first program loaded into main memory from an external medium (LAN, disk, ...
- The ISL environment provides the following capabilities:
- • Execute user-entered commands to modify boot device paths and boot options in stable storage.
- Invoking ISL from the Boot Console Handler
- ISL:
- Boot Console Handler:firmware,
- Boot Console Handler:firmware,
- To update a system’s firmware, the firmware patch must be obtained from the patch server website ...
- Step 1. Verify the checksum of the file ".FRM" using the "
- Identify Current Version of Firmware (on system to be updated)
- Step 1. Re-boot your system and do the following:
- To install the firmware update
- To install the firmware update
- The following are the directions from the readme file that are the firmware updating instructions...
- Step 1. Install the tape you have just created into your tape drive.
- Step 1. Install the tape you have just created into your tape drive.
- Step 2. Shutdown your system via the power switch and power back on, or execute the reboot comman...
- Step 3. When the display reads "Searching for a system to boot" press [escape]. At the BOOT ADMIN...
- Step 4. Boot from the appropriate boot path. (You must boot from the device that contains the fir...
- Step 5. A warning message will be issued, followed by "
- Step 5. A warning message will be issued, followed by "
- After several screens go by, you will be informed as to what firmware image is on your system and...
- If the image on the tape has a higher revision number, type <
- NOTE FROM THIS POINT FORWARD, THIS PROCESS CANNOT BE INTERRUPTED UNTIL COMPLETION. INTERRUPTING T...
- You will see 2 carriage returns and 2 line feeds and then the display will remain the same. In ap...
- The system will continue the normal boot process from the default primary path.
- Firmware:update example,
- Product specifications:
- Product specifications:
- This appendix lists the regulatory specifications, safety requirements, environmental specificati...
- B1000/C3000:regulatory statements,
- B1000/C3000:regulatory statements,
- This section lists the regulatory and safety statements for the B1000 and the C3000 workstations.
- B1000/C3000:declaration of conformity,
- B1000/C3000:emissions regulations,
- B1000/C3000:emissions regulations,
- Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
- This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, ...
- Hewlett-Packard’s system certification tests were conducted with HP-supported peripheral devices ...
- Operation of this device is subject to the following conditions:
- • This device may not cause harmful interference.
- B1000/C3000:video statement,
- B1000/C3000:emissions regulations,
- B1000/C3000:acoustics,
- B1000/C3000:laser statements,
- B1000/C3000:LEDs,
- Electrostatic Discharge:ESD precautions,
- Electrostatic Discharge:ESD precautions,
- Electrostatic charges can damage the integrated circuits on printed circuits boards. To prevent s...
- • Stand on a static-free mat.
- • Stand on a static-free mat.
- • Wear a static strap to ensure that any accumulated electrostatic charge is discharged from your...
- • Connect all equipment together, including the static-free mat, static strap, routing nodes, and...
- • Keep uninstalled printed circuit boards in their protective antistatic bags.
- • Handle printed circuit boards by their edges, once you have removed them from their protective ...
- B1000/C3000:warnings,
- B1000/C3000:environmental specifications,
- B1000/C3000:electrical specifications,
- SCSI:
- SCSI:
- This appendix provides information about connecting Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) device...
- The following topics are covered within this section:
- • SCSI bus differences
- If you are on a B1000/C3000 workstation, the instructions in this chapter assume you are using HP...
- NOTE When attaching external SCSI devices, be sure to terminate the last device on the external S...
- SCSI:bus differences
- SCSI:bus differences
- A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) bus is an IEEE standard bus for connecting your worksta...
- There are two types of SCSI buses available with this workstation—an Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SC...
- SCSI:mixing NSE and LVD devices on the same bus
- <TABLE>
- SCSI:scsi restrictions
- SCSI:scsi restrictions
- This section describes the SCSI restrictions that apply to your workstation in the following areas:
- • Cables
- NOTE The Ultra Narrow, single-ended SCSI bus supports only 7 devices because address 7 is reserve...
- Cables
- Cables
- Only SCSI cables approved by HP can be used to connect your workstation and any SCSI devices. HP ...
- <TABLE>
- HP offers the following SCSI cables for connecting externally connected devices to the system Ult...
- <TABLE>
- CAUTION SCSI cables approved by HP are designed to function within the SCSI tolerances for HP dev...
- Always use the shortest possible cable(s) for your configuration.
- NOTE See “Determining SCSI Bus Length” later in this Appendix to determine the total length of yo...
- SCSI:terminators
- Number of Devices Per SCSI Bus
- Considerations for Selecting SCSI Devices
- Considerations for Selecting SCSI Devices
- SCSI devices supported by the Hewlett-Packard Company for the Ultra Narrow Single-Ended (NSE) and...
- If devices other than those supported by HP are connected to the Ultra Narrow Single-Ended or the...
- Because Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI is a relatively new technology, there can be pr...
- Low-voltage differential signaling specifications are described in the
- Global Engineering Documents
- 15 Inverness Way East
- Englewood, CO 80112-5704
- (800) 854-7179 or (303) 397-7956
- SCSI:bus lengths
- SCSI:bus lengths
- This section discusses SCSI bus length constraints for the Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI bus and...
- SCSI:Ultra Narrow Single-Ended,
- SCSI:Ultra Narrow Single-Ended,
- The maximum cable length for a Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI bus is 3 meters. The HP Visualize B...
- NOTE When calculating the total Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI cable/bus/trace length used extern...
- There are two total cable length specifications that apply to the Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI ...
- The total cable length specifications are described below:
- • For a total of one to four devices being connected to the NSE SCSI bus the total length of cabl...
- NOTE Remember that the workstation is counted as one of the total device, and the internal length...
- SCSI:Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential,
- SCSI:device IDs,
- SCSI:device IDs,
- Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check the existing SCSI device IDs. ...
- 1. At a command line prompt, enter the following:
- After a few moments, the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could find. The list...
- Class I H/W Path Driver S/W State H/W Type Description
- Assigning Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI Device IDs
- Assigning Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI Device IDs
- SCSI:connecting to the ports,
- SCSI:connecting to the ports,
- This section describes how to connect to the system SCSI ports (Ultra Narrow Single-Ended and Ult...
- System SCSI Port Connection
- System SCSI Port Connection
- The system contains two SCSI connectors:
- • Ultra Narrow, Single-Ended SCSI (NSE SCSI) connector
- Figure B-1 shows the two SCSI connectors. SCSI cables connect to these ports with a high-density ...
- FigureB1. SCSI Ports
- NOTE It is necessary to put a terminator on unused SCSI connectors on the rear panel, or the last...
- Reference documentation:
- Reference documentation:
- This appendix provides part numbers and titles to related documentation.
- This appendix provides part numbers and titles to related documentation.
- Installation Manual
- Service Manuals
- Reference Manuals
- Glossary
- Glossary
- A
- B
- C
- C
- CD-RAM
- CD-RAM disk
- CD-RAM drive
- CD-ROM
- CD-ROM disk
- CD-ROM drive
- Central Processing Unit (CPU)
- child directory
- click
- cluster
- cluster client.
- cluster node
- cluster server
- cold install.
- command.
- command argument
- command interpreter
- command option
- configuration
- console.
- control key sequence
- cpu
- current directory
- current session
- current working directory
- cursor
- D
- E
- F
- H
- I
- K-L
- M
- N
- O
- P
- R-S
- R-S
- RAM
- ROM
- root
- scroll bar
- SCSI
- SCSI ID.
- server
- session
- shell
- shell command
- shell script
- shutdown
- slider
- Small Computer System Interface (SCSI)
- SPA.
- soft physical address.
- standalone
- Style Manager
- subdirectory
- superuser
- system administrator
- system call
- system name
- T-U
- W
Service Handbook
HP VISUALIZE B1000/C3000 UNIX®Workstations
Manufacturing Part Number: n.a.
Printed in USA May 2001
Edition E0501
2
Notice
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Hewlett-Packard assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on
equipment that is not furnished by Hewlett-Packard.
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights
reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced or translated to
another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Hewlett-Packard Warranty Statement
HP PRODUCT DURATION OF WARRANTY
HP VISUALIZE Workstations one Year
Model B1000/C3000
1. HP warrants HP hardware, accessories and supplies against defects in materials and
workmanship for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during
the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which
prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or like-new.
2. HP warrants that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions, for
the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly
installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP
will replace software media which does not execute its programming instructions due to
such defects.
3. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error
free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a
condition as warranted, the customer will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price
upon prompt return of the product.
4. HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or
may have been subject to incidental use.
5. The warranty period begins on the date of delivery or on the date of installation if
installed by HP. If customer schedules installation or causes installation by HP to be
delayed more than 30 days after delivery, warranty begins on the 31st day from
delivery.
6. Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate
maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by
3
HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published
environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or
maintenance.
7. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE
EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN
OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
8. HP will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the greater of
$300,000 or the actual amount paid for the product that is the subject of the claim, and
for damages for bodily injury or death, to the extent that all such damages are
determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have been directly caused by a
defective HP product.
9. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS
WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE
REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR
OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND: THE
WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE
EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY
AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS
APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government Department of Defense is subject to
restrictions as set forth in paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and
Software clause in DFARS 252.227.7013.
© Copyright 2001 Hewlett-Packard Company. All Rights Reserved.
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights
are reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced or translated to
another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard Company.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed
exclusively through X/Open Company Limited.
© Copyright 1980, 1984 AT&T, Inc.
© Copyright 1979, 1980, 1983 The Regents of the University of California.
This software and documentation is based in part on the Fourth Berkeley Software
Distribution under license from the Regents of University of California.
4
Printing History
New editions of this manual incorporate all material updated since the previous edition.
Update packages may be issued between editions and contain replacement and additional
pages to be merged into the manual by the user.
The manual part number and printing date indicate its current edition. The manual part
number changes when extensive technical changes are incorporated. The printing date
changes when a new edition is printed. (Minor corrections and updates which are
incorporated at reprint do not cause the date to change.)
HP Part Number Printing Date Edition
Non-Applicable May 2001 First
Contents
5
1. Product Information
Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
System Unit Front Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
System LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
System Power Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Storage Device Controls and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Security Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
System Unit Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Audio Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
USB Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
HP Parallel I/O Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
802.3 Network Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
RS-232 Serial Input/Output Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
SCSI Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
TOC Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Power Cord Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Security Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Monitor Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
HP Supported USB Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
USB Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
USB HP Scroll Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
HP Hub for USB Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Operating System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Memory Failures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
2. Configuration
Chapter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Workstation Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
FRU Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Internal Storage Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
CD Drive (Optional) Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
6
Contents
Floppy Disk Drive (Optional) Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Monitor-Type Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3. Troubleshooting
Flow Diagrams for Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Identifying LCD-Indicated Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
LCD Fan Failures and Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Dealing with a Boot Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Searching for Bootable Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Stable Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Boot Command Notations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Supported Boot Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
ISL Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Selftest Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Chassis Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Memory Failures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Running System Verification Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Running ODE-Based Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4. Field Replaceable Units
Exchange and Non-exchange Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
FRUs Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
FRU Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
System Unit Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
System Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
System Unit Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Removable Media Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Contents
7
DIMM Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
System Unit LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
The System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
5. Diagrams
System Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
6. Boot Console Handler
Boot Console Handler Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Accessing the Boot Console Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Boot Console Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Booting The Workstation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Searching for Bootable Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Resetting the Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Displaying and Setting Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Displaying and Setting the Monitor Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
The Monitor Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Displaying the Current Monitor Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Setting the Monitor Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Setting the Monitor Type at Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Troubleshooting Monitor Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Displaying the Current Memory Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Memory Information Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Displaying the Status of the I/O slots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Displaying and Setting the Security Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Displaying and Setting Fastboot Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Displaying and Setting the LAN Station Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Displaying System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Displaying PIM Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
8
Contents
Stable Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
ISL Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Invoking ISL from the Boot Console Handler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
ISL User Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Obtaining and Updating System Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
To install the firmware update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Firmware Update Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
A. Product Specifications
Regulatory and Safety Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Emissions Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Special Video Configuration Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Emissions Regulations Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Acoustics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Laser Safety Statement (U.S.A.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Acoustics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
DC Magnetic Field Interference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Humidity (Non-condensing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Leakage Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Electrical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Line Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Contents
9
B. SCSI Connections
SCSI Bus Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
SCSI Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Terminators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Number of Devices Per SCSI Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Considerations for Selecting SCSI Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
SCSI Bus Length Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI Bus Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI Bus Length. . . . . . . . . .208
Assigning SCSI Device IDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Assigning Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI Device IDs. . . . . . . . . .211
Assigning Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI Device IDs .211
Connecting to the SCSI Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
System SCSI Port Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
C. Related Documentation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Installation Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Reference Manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Glossary
10
Contents
Figures
11
Figure 1-1.. System Unit Front Panel Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 1-2.. LCD Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 1-3.. CD Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Figure 1-4.. Floppy Drive Controls and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 1-5.. System Unit Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 1-6.. Audio Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 1-7.. Security Loop Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 2-1.. Hard Drive, 9Gbyte/18Gbyte Ultra2 Low Voltage Differential . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 2-2.. 9Gbyte, 7200 RPM, Hard Disk Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 2-3.. CD Drive Jumper Setting (Rear View). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 2-4.. Memory Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Figure 2-5.. PCI Card Slot Numbering and Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Figure 3-1.. Power On LCD, Troubleshooting Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 3-2.. Console Troubleshooting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 3-3.. Bootable Device Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Figure 3-4.. Troubleshooting HP-UX Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 3-5.. Fan Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Figure 4-1.. B1000/C3000 Workstation Main Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 4-2.. CD Drive Bracket Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 4-3.. Floppy Drive Bracket Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 4-4.. Hard Disk Drive Bracket Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 4-5.. Opening the Front Bezel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Figure 4-6.. Opening the Left Side Panel of the System Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Figure 4-7.. Unscrewing the Power Supply Captive Screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 4-8.. Propping Up the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 4-9.. Disconnecting the Power Supply Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Figure 4-10.. Removing the Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 4-11.. PCI Card Slot Numbering and Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Figure 4-12.. I/O Slot Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Figure 4-13.. Removing the I/O Card Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Figure 4-14.. Removing the I/O Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Figure 4-15.. Fan Cooling Areas for the System Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 4-16.. Removing the Fan from the Hard Disk Drive Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figure 4-17.. Removing the Fan Rivets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 4-18.. Removing CPU Area Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 4-19.. Removing the System Unit Air Divider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 4-20.. Removing the Fan and Speaker from the I/O Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Figure 4-21.. Removing the Fan and Speaker from the Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Figure 4-22.. Removing the CD Drive Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
12
Figures
Figure 4-23.. Front of System Unit with the Front Panel Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Figure 4-24.. Removing the CD Drive Bracket and Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Figure 4-25.. Installing the CD Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Figure 4-26.. Tightening the Bracket Screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Figure 4-27.. Plugging in the ATAPI and Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Figure 4-28.. Replacing the Rear EMI CD Drive Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Figure 4-29.. Removing the CD Drive’s Rear Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Figure 4-30.. Front of the System Unit with the Front Panel Removed. . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Figure 4-31.. Removing the CD Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Figure 4-32.. Installing the CD Drive Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Figure 4-33.. Tightening the Bracket Screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Figure 4-34.. Replacing the CD Drive Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Figure 4-35.. Removing the Floppy Disk’s Rear Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Figure 4-36.. Front of Workstation with the Front Panel Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Figure 4-37.. Removing the Floppy Disk Bracket and Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Figure 4-38.. Installing the Floppy Disk Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Figure 4-39.. Tightening the Bracket Screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Figure 4-40.. Plugging in the Data and Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Figure 4-41.. Replacing the Rear Floppy Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Figure 4-42.. Removing the Floppy Disk’s Rear Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Figure 4-43.. Front of Workstation with the Front Panel Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Figure 4-44.. Removing the Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Figure 4-45.. Installing the Floppy Disk Blank and Bracket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Figure 4-46.. Tightening the Bracket Screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Figure 4-47.. Replacing the Rear Floppy Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Figure 4-48.. The Hard Drive Slots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Figure 4-49.. Removing the Hard Drive Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Figure 4-50.. Inserting the Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Figure 4-51.. The Hard Drive Slots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Figure 4-52.. Removing the Hard Disk Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Figure 4-53.. Removing the Hard Disk Drive from the Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Figure 4-54.. Replacing the Hard Disk Drive Bracket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Figure 4-55.. Propping Up the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Figure 4-56.. DIMM Card Slot Numbers and Loading Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Figure 4-57.. Installing Memory Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Figure 4-58.. Propping Up the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Figure 4-59.. Removing Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Figure 4-60.. Removing the System Unit LCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Figure 4-61.. Removing the System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Figures
13
Figure 4-62.. Installing the System Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Figure 5-1.. Power Distribution Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 5-2.. System Unit Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure A-1.. VCCI Class B ITE (Japan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure A-2.. RRL Class A EMI (Korea) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure A-3.. EMI Class A (Taiwan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure B-1.. SCSI Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
14
Figures
Tables
15
Table 1-1.. CD Drive Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Table 1-2.. Floppy Drive Controls and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Table 1-3.. Audio Electrical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Table 1-4.. Serial I/O Pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Table 2-1.. Default Device IDs TABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Table 3-1.. Fan Numbers and Corresponding Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Table 3-2.. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Table 4-1.. Exchange Parts FRU List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Table 4-2.. Non-exchange Parts FRU List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Table 6-1.. System Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Table 6-2.. Mnemonic Style Notation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Table B-1.. SCSI Bus Differences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Table B-2.. Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Table B-3.. Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
16
Tables
17
1Product Information
This chapter introduces the HP VISUALIZE B1000/C3000 workstations, including their
controls and indicators. This information is provided to help familiarize you with the main
features and components of these workstations.
18 Chapter1
Product Information
Included in this chapter are the following topics:
• Product description
• System unit front panel controls
• System unit rear panel connectors
• Monitor information
• Keyboard and Mouse information
• Operating System Overview
Chapter 1 19
Product Information
Product Description
Product Description
The HP VISUALIZE B1000 and C3000 workstations contain the following key features:
• Processor:
— One 300MHz PA8500 processor in the B1000 or one 400MHz PA8500 processor in
the C3000
— One 750MHz PA8700 processor in the C3700
— The PA8500 processor has a 0.5MByte instruction cache and a 1.0MByte data cache
— The PA8700 processor has a 0.75MByte instruction cache and a 1.5MByte data cache
• Operating System:
The B1000/C3000 requires the HP-UX 10.20 and Workstation Additional Core
Enhancements (ACE) for HP-UX 10.20 (June, 1999) and the C3700 requires the HP-UX
11.0 and Workstation Additional Core Enhancements (ACE) for HP-UX 11.0
(November, 1999) or HP-UX 11i operating system and the Hardware Enablement
Bundle (HWE) for HP-UX 11i (June, 2001).
• User Interface:
HP CDE graphical user interface
• Compatibility: Source and binary code compatible with the Series 700 product family
• Monitors:
— 19-inch, 1280×1024 and 1600×1200 color, 75Hz
— 21-inch 1280×1024 (stereo capability) and 1600×1200 color, 75Hz
• Optional Graphics:
HP VISUALIZE-EG and VISUALIZE fx2 Pro (for B1000)
HP VISUALIZE-EG, VISUALIZE fx2 Pro and VISUALIZE fx4 Pro (for C3000)
• Main Memory:
— 128MByte and 256MByte DIMMs for B1000 and C3000 workstations
— Eight memory slots available per each B1000 and C3000 workstations
— Minimum of 128MBytes and a maximum of 2GBytes of memory (B1000 and C3000)
• Internal Storage Devices:
– Wide Ultra2 Low-Voltage Differential SCSI – up to two:
9.0 GB Hard Disk Drive
18.0 GB Hard Disk Drive
– Removable Media (one of each maximum)
CD-ROM Drive
20 Chapter1
Product Information
Product Description
Floppy Disk Drive
• Standard Network:
– RJ45, Twisted Pair 10 BaseT/100 BaseT
• Standard I/O Ports:
— Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential (LVD) SCSI, one
— Ultra Narrow Single-Ended (NSE) SCSI, one
— Parallel port (IEEE 1284), one
— Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports, two
— Serial Interface ports (RS-232C), two
— Audio ports (Line-in, Line-out, headset, and microphone-in)
• Optional I/O:
Six PCI slots are available for the B1000/C3000 workstations.
– 1 PCI 4X:64 bit, 66 MHz, primary graphics (full size, 3.3V)
– 2 PCI 1X:32 bit, 33 MHz, (half size, 5V)
– 3 PCI 2X:64 bit, 33 MHz, (full size, 5V)
• Keyboard:
– Universal Serial Bus (USB) keyboard, one
• Mouse:
– Universal Serial Bus (USB) mouse, one
Chapter 1 21
Product Information
System Unit Front Panel Controls
System Unit Front Panel Controls
Figure 1-1 shows the location of the system unit front panel controls.
Figure 1-1. System Unit Front Panel Controls
System LCD
The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) is located on the left side of the front panel. The LCD
displays 2-lines of information, with up to 16-characters per line. It displays messages
about the state of the system, including error codes. Figure 1-2. on page 22, describes the
symbols representing the different system activities. For information about error codes,
refer to Chapter 3 , “Troubleshooting,” on page 47.
System
System
LCD Display
Power Switch
Storage
Devices
Security
Lock
22 Chapter1
Product Information
System Unit Front Panel Controls
Figure 1-2. LCD Symbols
System Power Switch
Use the Power switch to power the system unit on and off. When you use the soft power
down procedure, the B1000/C3000 workstations’ hardware is designed to produce the
proper diagnostic and self test messages, and broadcasts a warning message to remote
terminals that it is about to shutdown. The operating system executes an automatic
shutdown -q command. Turning the power switch back on again automatically boots up
the HP-UX 10.20 or later operating system if the system has been configured to auto
boot. For information on setting auto boot, refer to the section “Setting the Auto Boot
and Auto Search Flags” on page 178.
Storage Device Controls and Features
This workstation allows either or both of the following internal storage devices: CD drive
or floppy disk drive. The following sections describe the controls and features of these
devices.
NOTE
You cannot have two internal storage devices of the same type. For example,
you cannot have two floppy disk drives, and you cannot have two CDROMs.
Figure 1-3. shows the operating controls and features of the CD drive, and Table 1-1.
describes those controls and features.
Chapter 1 23
Product Information
System Unit Front Panel Controls
Figure 1-3. CD Drive
NOTE
The audio features of the CD drive are supported through applications only.
One such application is xmcd. The xmcd utility is not a part of HP-UX, you
will need to download it off the web using your web browser and this URL:
http://metalab.unc.edu/tkan/xmcd
Table 1-1. CD Drive Controls
Control/Feature Purpose
Eject Button Press to open the Disc Tray and insert or remove a disc. When
the drive is in use, press the eject button for more than one
second to open the Disc Tray. Press to close the tray.
Emergency Eject If the workstation does no have power, you can insert the end
of a paper clip into this small hole to open the Disc Tray.
Disk Tray The Disk Tray holds the CD. This style of CD drive does not
use a disk caddy.
Busy Indicator Lights during a data access operation and blinks during a
data transfer. The indicator blinks initially and then stays lit
when there is one of the following.
• A defective disc
• A disc insertion error (for example, an upside down disc)
• No disc present
Emergency
Eject Eject ButtonBusy Indicator
Disk Tray
24 Chapter1
Product Information
System Unit Front Panel Controls
The optional floppy disk drive (Product Number A5009A) is a 3.5-inch form factor device
with a PC/AT interface. It connects to the workstation via a 34-pin PC/AT ribbon cable and
a 4-pin power cable. The floppy disk drive has up to 1.44 MByte capacity depending on the
media and format used.
Figure 1-4. shows the operating controls and features of the floppy drive, and Table 1-2.
describes those controls and features.
Figure 1-4. Floppy Drive Controls and Features
Security Lock
Access to the mass storage devices is controlled by a security lock on the front panel.
Locking the workstation front panel minimizes potential unauthorized user access.
To prevent access to internal components requires the use of the security loop on the rear
panel of the workstation. See “Unit Rear Panel Controls”.
Table 1-2. Floppy Drive Controls and Features
Control/Feature Purpose
Floppy Drive Eject Button Push the eject button to remove floppy
diskettes from the drive.
Floppy Drive Activity
LED The floppy drive LED flashes to
indicate the drive is in use.
Eject ButtonBusy Indicator
Chapter 1 25
Product Information
System Unit Rear Panel Connectors
System Unit Rear Panel Connectors
This section describes the following connectors on the system unit’s rear panel:
• Two serial ports (RS-232)
• Two Universal Serial Bus ports (USB)
• LAN connector, 10 BaseT/100 BaseT
• HP parallel IEEE 1284 (printer) connector
• Audio connectors (PCI based, line in, line out, headset, and microphone in)
• Ultra2 Wide LVD (Low Voltage Differential) SCSI
• Ultra Narrow Single-Ended (NSE) SCSI
• TOC (transfer of control) button
• AC power cord connector
• Security loop
NOTE
To maintain FCC/EMI compliance, verify that all cables are fully seated and
properly fastened.
Figure 1-5. System Unit Rear Panel Connectors
AC Power Cord
Parallel Port
LAN Port
Ultra Narrow Single-Ended (NSE) SCSI
Security Loop
Ultra2 Wide LVD SCSI
USB Ports (2)
Serial Ports (2)
TOC Button
Audio Connectors:
Line In
Line Out
Microphone
Headphones
Connector
26 Chapter1
Product Information
System Unit Rear Panel Connectors
Audio Connectors
The Model B1000 and C3000 workstations have audio-input and -output capabilities
through external input and output connectors on the rear panel and through an internal
speaker. The sound is 16-bit, 44 kHz (CD-quality).
The rear panel contains the Audio IN (Stereo line-in) and Microphone (Mic-in), and Audio
OUT (Stereo line-out) and Headphones (headphone-out) connectors. This workstation also
has a mono internal speaker.
The audio connectors are standard stereo audio mini-jacks (see Figure 1-6).
NOTE
Hewlett-Packard recommends using gold-plated plugs available through
audio retailers for best quality recording and playback through the external
connectors.
Figure 1-6. Audio Connectors
Table 1-3. summarizes the audio electrical specifications for the Model B1000/C3000
workstations.
Headset
Audio IN
Audio OUT
Microphone IN
Chapter 1 27
Product Information
System Unit Rear Panel Connectors
USB Connectors
The USB connectors located on the rear panel of the workstation provide an interface for
the keyboard and mouse to the system. These USB connectors support only the HP
keyboard, scroll mouse and hub. The keyboard and mouse may be plugged into the rear of
the workstation or plugged into the USB hub. No other USB configuration is currently
supported. Consult the documentation that accompanies each input device for specific
information concerning its use.
For more information on the Universal Serial Bus, refer to the following URL:
http://www.usb.org
CAUTION
Usage of devices other than USB specification may result in unpredictable
functionality and inferior performance of the B1000/C3000 workstations.
NOTE
The USB clip on the rear of the chassis provides strain relief for the USB
cables.
HP Parallel I/O Connector
The 25-pin HP Parallel I/O interface uses IEEE 1284 I/O interface protocols to support
peripheral devices such as printers and plotters. Consult the documentation that
accompanies each peripheral device for specific information concerning its use.
802.3 Network Connectors
The B1000/C3000 workstations have a built-in Twisted Pair (TP) connector for the 802.3
(ETHERNET) or 10BaseT/100BaseT network. Connections to ThinLAN networks require
Table 1-3. Audio Electrical Specifications
Frequency Response 25 to 20KHz
Input Sensitivity/Impedance
Line in 2.0V pk/47kohm
Microphone in 22mVpk/1kohm
Max Output Level/Impedance
Line Out 2.8Vpp/47kohm
Headphone 2.75Vpp/50ohm
Speaker (internal) 5.88Vpp/48ohm
Output Impedance
Line Out 619ohm
Headphone 118ohm
28 Chapter1
Product Information
System Unit Rear Panel Connectors
an external transceiver. The workstation automatically selects the correct network setting.
RS-232 Serial Input/Output Connectors
There are a variety of peripheral devices that can attach to the RS-232 Serial
Input/Output (SIO) ports on this workstation. Refer to the label on the rear of the
workstation to locate serial port 1 and serial port 2. Peripheral devices include printers,
plotters, modems, and scanners. Consult the documentation that accompanies each
peripheral device for specific information concerning its use.
The SIO ports are programmable, allowing functions such as bit rate, character length,
parity, and stop bits to be set using the System Administration Manager (SAM) or by
selecting a system special device file with the functions already programmed. The SIO
Ports are used as interfaces for serial asynchronous devices to the CPU.
Table 1-4. shows the SIO connector pin listings. The serial connectors are 9-pin D-sub
connectors. Signal names are those specified in the EIA RS-232 standard.
SCSI Connectors
The B1000/C3000 workstations have built in SCSI connectors for Ultra2 Wide
Low-Voltage Differential (LVD) SCSI and Ultra Narrow Single-Ended (NSE) SCSI. Use
the SCSI connectors to connect external SCSI devices such as DDS-format tape drives and
CD-ROM drives. Consult the documentation that accompanies each SCSI device for
specific information concerning its use. Refer to Appendix B, SCSI Connections, for
information about connecting SCSI devices to your workstation.
NOTE
There must ALWAYS be a terminator at both ends of a SCSI bus. This means
one internal terminator and one external terminator.
Table 1-4. Serial I/O Pins
Pin No. Signal Description
1 DCD Data Carrier Detect
2 RXD Receive Data
3 TXD Transmit Data
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready
5 GND Ground
6 DSR Data Set Ready
7 RTS Request To Send
8 CTS Clear To Send
9 RI Ring Indicator
Chapter 1 29
Product Information
System Unit Rear Panel Connectors
TOC Button
The TOC (transfer of control) button interrupts the system and transfers control from the
default device to an auxiliary device. A transfer of control saves the state of the processor
in Processor Internal Memory (PIM) and begins execution of recovery software at a
nonzero location specified by a special location in Page Zero called MEM_TOC. The TOC
code is protected by a checksum.
Power Cord Connector
Plug the workstation’s power cord into the power cord connector to provide AC power to
the system.
Security Loop
The security loop provides a means of locking the left side panel with a padlock or other
locking device to prevent unauthorized access. To operate the security loop:
1. Inspect left side panel for proper seating in the mainframe chassis.
2. Push in the retractable pin on the spring loaded square fastener.
3. Insert the locking device through the top and bottom holes of the square fastener.
4. Inspect after locking device is in place to assure that the retractable pin is captured in
the side panel insert hole.
The internal components of the workstation is now secured. See Figure 1-7. on page 30.
NOTE
A locking device is not supplied with the workstation; the customer must
supply a lock to use with the security loop.
30 Chapter1
Product Information
System Unit Rear Panel Connectors
Figure 1-7. Security Loop Operation
Security Loop Pin
Hole
Security Loop Pin Pushed
In Place By The Padlock
Security Loop Pin
and Spring
Chapter 1 31
Product Information
Monitor Information
Monitor Information
The B1000/C3000 workstations support the following monitors:
• 19-inch, 1280×1024 color monitor (A4575A)
• 19-inch, 1600×1200 color monitor (A4575A)
• 21-inch, 1280×1024 color monitor (A4576A)
• 21-inch, 1600×1200 color monitor (A4576A)
For information on the A4575A monitors, see:
•HP A4575A Color Monitor CE Handbook (A4575-90099)
The A4575A is a 19" high-range resolution, multi-mode color monitor for use on
workstations and X-terminals. The 19" refers to the tube size. This monitor only has an 18"
visible display. This monitor can be used in the Northern and Southern hemispheres. The
A4575A and A4576A are substitutes for the A4331A/D and the A4332A. It is a full
multi-sync/multi-frequency multi-mode product capable of running in VGA mode with
resolutions ranging from 640 ×480 up to a maximum resolution of 1600×1200 (75Hz).
For information on the A4576A monitor, see:
•HP A4576A Color Monitor CE Handbook (A4576-90039)
The A4576A is a 21" high-range resolution, multi-mode color monitor for use on
workstations. The 21" refers to the tube size. This monitor only has an 20" visible display.
This monitor can be used in the Northern hemisphere. It is a full
multi-sync/multi-frequency multi-mode product capable of running in VGA mode with
resolutions ranging from 640×480 up to a maximum resolution of 1600×1200 (75Hz).
NOTE
Note that the word “multi-sync” is used as a common word to refer to
“multi-frequency” and/or “multi-mode.” Care should be taken when using
“multi-sync” because “MultiSync (TM)” is a registered trademark of NEC.
NOTE
The connection to earlier HP monitors with 15-pin mini-DSub cables can be
made using the A4168A adapter cable shipped with the system miscellaneous
kit.
32 Chapter1
Product Information
HP Supported USB Devices
HP Supported USB Devices
USB Keyboard
The HP VISUALIZE B1000/C3000 workstations support USB keyboards. The keyboard
shipped with the workstation provides a localized PC-104, PC-105 or HP-JIS-106
compatible input device for USB-equipped PA-RISC workstations and other
USB-compatible computers that support the HP-UX operating system. The keyboard
includes a captive cable terminated in a USB Style A connector.
The USB keyboard is designed specifically for use with HP workstations. All keyboard
models with the exception of the JIS-106 layout may also be compatible with conventional
personal computers.
Some applications may expect to use keycodes generated by keys existing on other types of
keyboards. Consult the documentation that accompanies each input device for specific
information concerning its use.
NOTE
HIL and PS/2 devices are not supported by the B1000/C3000 workstations.
USB HP Scroll Mouse
The HP scroll mouse (USB) has a left and right button that function the same as most
mice. However, it also has a scroll wheel located between the two buttons that allows for
vertical scrolling in a window. Note that vertical scrolling will only occur if you are in a
window’s vertical scroll bar. This scroll wheel also functions as a middle button when you
press down on it. Essentially, the HP scroll mouse is a three-button mouse.
For general information on the various cursor shapes associated with different areas of HP
CDE while using a mouse, see the Using Your HP Workstation document.
HP Hub for USB Devices
The HP USB hub (part number D6804) provides the ability to connect more than one USB
device to the workstation, as well as the ability to extend your USB device’s cable length.
As an example, you may desire to locate the workstation’s keyboard and mouse at a
greater distance from your workstation. To accomplish this, connect the HP USB hub to
one of the USB connectors on the rear of the system. The keyboard and mouse are then
plugged into the USB hub. This is the only acceptable USB hub configuration currently
supported by Hewlett-Packard.
Chapter 1 33
Product Information
Operating System Overview
Operating System Overview
The B1000/C3000 workstation uses the HP-UX operating system, version 10.20 and the
Workstation Additional Core Enhancements for HP-UX 10.20 (June, 1999). The B3700
workstation uses the HP-UX 11.0 and Workstation Additional Core Enhancements (ACE)
for HP-UX 11.0 (November, 1999) or HP-UX 11i operating system and the Hardware
Enablement Bundle (HWE) for HP-UX 11i (June, 2001). To verify which version of the
operating system you are running, use the following command in a terminal window:
system name:$ swlist -l bundle Enter
If you’re running HP-UX 11.0, the result from this command will be similar to this:
# Bundle (s):
B3929BA B.11.00 HP OnLineJFS (Advanced VxFS)
B5357AA B.11.00.02 MPWeb2.0 s700 reference bundle
B5357AAA B.11.00.02 HP MPower//Web for Series 700 - English
B6268AA B.11.00.03 Graphics and Technical Computing Software
B8342AA B.11.00.03 Netscape Communicator 4.72
HPUXEng64RT B.11.00.01 English HP-UX 64-bit Runtime Environment
QPK1100 B.11.00.49.01 Quality Pack for HP-UX 11.00 (June 2000)
UXCoreMedia B.11.00.01 HP-UX Media Kit (Reference Only. See Description)
XSWGR1100 B.11.00.49.3 HP-UX General Release Patches, June 2000
Instant Ignition systems (systems with preloaded software) have X-Windows,
Hewlett-Packard’s graphical user interface, and HP CDE installed and configured.
If the Instant Ignition system does not have the kernel preconfigured with all of the device
drivers, you need to refer to the manual Managing Systems and Workgroups to configure
your kernel.
For problems or questions with Instant Ignition, refer to Using Your HP Workstation for
more information.
Note that both of the documents mentioned in the previous paragraphs can be found at the
following Uniform Resource Locator (URL):
http://www.docs.hp.com/
34 Chapter1
Product Information
Memory
Memory
The main memory for an HP VISUALIZE B1000/C3000 workstation can vary from a
minimum of 128 MBytes to a maximum of 2 GBytes. The workstation has eight memory
card slots. Currently the B1000/C3000 workstations support only 128 MByte and 256
MByte memory DIMM cards in these slots.
To install DIMM cards in the B1000/C3000 workstation reference “Installing Additional
Memory” on page 141 in this Service Handbook.
CAUTION
If memory is installed improperly or it is defective the B1000/C3000
workstation operating system will not boot-up, and a DIMM error will appear
in the LCD. If an error does occur, reference Chapter 3, “Troubleshooting” for
additional information.
Memory Failures
The HP VISUALIZE B1000/C3000 system (with HP-UX 10.20 and later) uses Memory Page
Deallocation, a feature that allows the system to provide information to the operating
system about memory failures.
You can use the command memrpt with the detail switch to obtain information about the
Memory Page Deallocation Table (PDT) as well as single bit errors logged by the system.
# /usr/sbin/sysdiag Enter
DUI>logtool Enter
LOGTOOL>memrpt detail Enter
The PDT can also be checked using the pdt command in the Service menu of the Boot
Console Handler (Refer to Chapter 6). If you replace a defective DIMM, use the Service
Menu pdt clear command to clear out the PDT.
35
2Configuration
This chapter provides details about setting up and changing the system configuration for
the HP VISUALIZE B1000/C3000 workstations.
36 Chapter2
Configuration
Chapter Overview
Chapter Overview
This chapter contains the following sections:
• Workstation Configurations
• Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Configurations
— Internal Storage Devices
— Memory
— I/O Cards
— Monitor-Type Selection
Chapter 2 37
Configuration
Workstation Configurations
Workstation Configurations
Refer to the HP Workstations Website for a complete list of supported accessories,
peripherals, and operating system versions for the HP VISUALIZE B1000/C3000
workstations. The URL for the Website is:
http://www.hp.com/workstations/support/
38 Chapter2
Configuration
FRU Configurations
FRU Configurations
This section provides information for setting up or changing the configuration of the
system Field Replaceable Units (FRUs).
Internal Storage Configurations
Hard Disk Drive Configuration
The SCSI IDs for hard disk drives are hard-wired into the SCA Ultra2 Wide LVD SCSI
interfaces in the backplane of the two disk bays within the B1000 and C3000 workstations.
Hence, SCSI IDs do not need to be set for the hard disk drives (up to two) installed in these
workstations. From top to bottom, the pre-set SCSI IDs for hard disk drives are: 6 and 5.
Similarly, no jumpers are installed at the factory, nor is any jumper installation required
at the customer’s site, on either of the hard disk drive models that are supported with the
B1000 and C3000 workstations. Both hard disk drive models may be installed into these
workstations. See the section titled “Hard Disk Drive” on page 134 for details on installing
hard disk drives.
NOTE
There must ALWAYS be a terminator at both ends of a SCSI bus. This means
one internal terminator and one external terminator.
Table 2-1 lists the default device IDs for internal storage devices. These IDs are the default
IDs for each storage device. If an existing device already uses an ID, select an alternate ID.
Figures 2-1 and 2-2 show the two types of hard disk drives supported for the B1000/C3000
workstation.
Table 2-1. Default Device IDs TABLE
Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI
1st Hard Disk Drive ID6
2nd Hard Disk Drive ID5
DDS Drive, external optional device ID3
** Do not assign SCSI ID7 to any internal storage device.
Chapter 2 39
Configuration
FRU Configurations
Figure 2-1. Hard Drive, 9Gbyte/18Gbyte Ultra2 Low Voltage Differential
The hard disk drive in Figure 2-2 is used exclusively for the HP VISUALIZE B1000
workstation.
Figure 2-2. 9Gbyte, 7200 RPM, Hard Disk Drive
40 Chapter2
Configuration
FRU Configurations
Configuring a Hard Disk Drive
This section describes how to add a hard drive to your system as a file system using SAM.
For more information about configuring a hard disk drive, refer to the manual Managing
Systems and Workgroups.
The procedures in this section require you to log in as root. If you cannot log in as root,
contact your system administrator.
1. Log in as root and create a mount directory (for example, /disk1).
2. Move the mouse pointer to the Application Manager control for tools and click the left
mouse button.
3. Click twice on the System_Admin icon in the Application Manager window.
4. Click twice on the Sam icon in the Application Manager -- System_Admin window. If you
are root, the System Application Manager (SAM) will appear on your screen; otherwise
you will be asked to enter the root password and press Enter. The SAM window will
appear. You will then need to re-execute steps 1 through 4.
5. Double click on the Disk and File System icon.
Chapter 2 41
Configuration
FRU Configurations
6. Double click on the Disk Devices icon.
The following screen message is displayed:
Scanning the system’s hardware...
The Disk and File Systems window opens containing a list of drives currently
configured on this system. You need to select one of the appropriate drives that is not in
use.
7. Click on Add in the Actions menu and select the item Not Using the Logical Volume
Manager.
8. Enter the mount directory name in the Mount Directory field of the Add Disk window
and click on OK. The following message appears:
Task started.
Creating the device file...
Modifying “/etc/checklist”...
Task completed.
Click OK. You have successfully added a hard disk drive to your system unit.
42 Chapter2
Configuration
FRU Configurations
CD Drive (Optional) Configuration
The optional CD drive connects to the ATAPI (IDE) interface in the CD drive bay
backplane within the B1000/C3000 workstations via a 40-pin ribbon cable, a 4-pin audio
cable, and a 4-pin power cable. No interfacing addressing is required for the CD drive.
However, as shown in Figure 2-3. the CD drive should have a jumper set on the C SEL
(Cable Select) selection pins. (The CD drive should ship from the factory already jumpered
for C SEL.)
CAUTION
CD-ROM drives are susceptible to mechanical and electrostatic shock. When
handling the drive, always wear the static-grounding wrist strap that came in
the CD-ROM drive kit. Always handle the drive carefully.
Figure 2-3. CD Drive Jumper Setting (Rear View)
See the section titled “Installing a CD Drive” on page 117 for installation details.
Floppy Disk Drive (Optional) Configuration
The optional 3.5-inch floppy disk drive requires no ID, switch, or jumper settings. See the
section titled “Installing a Floppy Disk Drive” on page 125 for installation details.
CAUTION
Floppy disk drives are susceptible to mechanical and electrostatic shock.
When handling the drive, always wear the static-grounding wrist strap that
came in the floppy disk drive kit. Always handle the drive carefully.
Jumpered for C SEL
Chapter 2 43
Configuration
FRU Configurations
Memory
This workstation has 8 memory slots, labeled 0 through 7. Memory can be configured from
128MB to 1.4GB for the B1000 and 256 MB to 2 GB for the C3000. Memory does not have
to be configured in pairs for the B1000/C3000, but must be loaded in the order described in
Figure 2-4.. Notice the alternating load pattern by location on the system board.
Figure 2-4. Memory Connectors
CAUTION
The memory cards must be installed in the correct order, else the system will
not boot properly.
Hard Disk
Drive Fan
44 Chapter2
Configuration
FRU Configurations
The B1000/C3000 workstation supports the 128 MByte DIMMs or the 256 MByte DIMMs.
If users install different size memory boards in a single unit, the largest size must be
loaded first then the smaller capacity memory boards for maximum performance. For
example, load a 256 MByte DIMM in slot 0 and a 128 MByte DIMM in slot 1.
NOTE
Users who wish to achieve both maximum performance and maximum future
capacity are advised to use 256 MB boards exclusively.
See the section titled “DIMM Cards” on page 141 for details on installing memory. Also,
note that there is a label on the floor of the workstation’s interior showing the
B1000/C3000 memory loading order.
Use the Boot Console Handler to verify that the workstation recognizes the installed
memory. See “Displaying the Current Memory Configuration” on page 175 of this manual.
Chapter 2 45
Configuration
FRU Configurations
I/O Cards
There are six I/O slots located on the rear panel of the B1000 and C3000 workstations.
Slots 1 through 4 are full-size PCI slots. Slots 5 and 6 are half-size Peripheral Connect
Interface (PCI) slots. See Figure 2-5. for a brief description of slot capabilities.
Figure 2-5. PCI Card Slot Numbering and Capabilities
To maintain good graphics performance, you should always use slot 2 (SL2) as your
primary graphics card slot and slot 4 (SL4) as your secondary graphics card slot.
NOTE
If you connect your monitor to a different graphics card slot, you will need to
change the graphics path for that monitor. To do this see the section,
“Displaying and Setting the Monitor Type” in Chapter 6, Boot Console
Handler in this document.
See the section titled “I/O Cards” on page 106 for details on installing I/O cards.
46 Chapter2
Configuration
FRU Configurations
Monitor-Type Selection
The B1000/C3000 supports the following monitors:
• 19-inch, 1280×1024 color monitor, 75 Hz (A4575A)
• 19-inch, 1600×1200 color monitor, 75 Hz (A4575A)
• 21-inch, 1280×1024 color monitor (stereo capability), 75 Hz (A4576A)
• 21-inch, 1600×1200 color monitor, 75 Hz (A4576A)
The monitor type does not have to change since the workstation is set up to support the
above mentioned monitors. However, if for some reason the monitor type needs to
change, refer to Chapter 6, Boot Console Handler, of this manual.
Note that connection to earlier HP monitors with 15-pin mini-DSub cables can be made
using the A4168A adapter cable shipped with your system miscellaneous kit.
NOTE
Unsupported monitors may “lock up” if unable to sync to a scan rate provided
by the workstation.
NOTE
The B1000/C3000 workstations support a maximum of four VISUALIZE-EG
graphics cards with four monitors. One, two, three, or four VISUALIZE-EG
graphics cards may be installed per workstation.
47
3Troubleshooting
This chapter provides information about isolating a failing component, known as a Field
Replaceable Unit (FRU), in the B1000/C3000 workstations.
48 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
To troubleshoot a HP VISUALIZE B1000/C3000 workstation, you must be familiar with the
HP-UX operating system and be able to start and stop processes. You should also be
familiar with the boot ROM diagnostics, and the Mesa (Support Tools Manager) on-line
tests, which we describe in this chapter.
As a super-user who is troubleshooting a HP-UX system, you should be able to shutdown
and reboot a system, start and stop processes, and examine error logs. You should also be
able to use systems utilities such as ioscan to check device files and configurations,
swlist to show loaded patches and software bundles, and SAM to configure and show
enabled services and configurations. You should also be familiar with STM, the on-line
diagnostics tool. You can view a man page on any of these on-line utilities or commands.
Note any error or status messages, then run the power-up boot ROM diagnostics, known as
Self Test. If the Self Test diagnostics fail, replace the FRU that is indicated. If the tests
pass, but you still suspect a problem, run the ISL diagnostics and Mesa (Support Tools
Manager) on-line tests.
For a complete description of using ISL diagnostics and using Mesa (Support Tools
Manager), refer to the website URL:
http://wojo.rose.hp.com/
Chapter 3 49
Troubleshooting
Flow Diagrams for Troubleshooting
Flow Diagrams for Troubleshooting
The following four figures contain troubleshooting flowcharts you can follow to isolate a
failing Field Replaceable Unit (FRU). Figure 3-1., “Power On LCD, Troubleshooting Flow,”
contains the main troubleshooting flowchart. Figures 3-2 through 3-4 then contain
flowcharts for console, bootable device, and HP-UX troubleshooting, respectively.
NOTE
For the system to power up, the left side panel must be properly seated in the
mainframe chassis to engage the safety interlock switch.
50 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Flow Diagrams for Troubleshooting
Figure 3-1. Power On LCD, Troubleshooting Flow
Chapter 3 51
Troubleshooting
Flow Diagrams for Troubleshooting
Figure 3-2. Console Troubleshooting Messages
52 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Flow Diagrams for Troubleshooting
Figure 3-3. Bootable Device Troubleshooting
Chapter 3 53
Troubleshooting
Flow Diagrams for Troubleshooting
Figure 3-4. Troubleshooting HP-UX Boot
54 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Identifying LCD-Indicated Conditions
Identifying LCD-Indicated Conditions
This workstation uses an LCD panel to display firmware/OS progress codes. the codes,
referred to as chassis codes, consist of one of the mnemonics listed below, followed by a
4-digit hexadecimal number identifying the code module being executed. The mnemonics
and their meanings are:
FLT A hardware error has been detected
TST Hardware being tested
SHU System being shutdown
INI Hardware being initialized
WRN A non-optimal operating condition exists
RUN Computer is running operating system
In general, the LCD display has the following format:
ZZZ Three character chassis code mnemonic
YYYY Four digit hexadecimal code
FFFFFF Six character field replaceable unit description
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW Description of the chassis code
If the system encounters an FLT code while the system is booting, the FLT code is
interpreted and a message is displayed. For example, you may have information similar to
the following in the LCD:
FLT Three character chassis code mnemonic
30FC Four digit hexadecimal code
SYS BD Six character field replaceable unit description
bad sys bd id Description of the chassis code
ZZZ YYYY: FFFFFF
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
Line 1
Line 2
Chapter 3 55
Troubleshooting
LCD Fan Failures and Warnings
LCD Fan Failures and Warnings
This section provides the failure and warning messages you will see in the LCD if there is
a problem with a fan in the B1000/C3000 workstation.
A chassis code which indicates that a fan has failed (FLT D01n) or is running too slowly
(WRN D02n) within a B1000 or C3000 workstation specifies the fan number, n. Table 3-1.,
“Fan Numbers and Corresponding Name,” lists the fan numbers and their names.
Here is an example of a failure message for the I/O (PCI card) fan:
Here is an example of a warning message for the Turbo Cooler Fan, CPU:
To locate the correct fan, see Figure 3-5.
Table 3-1. Fan Numbers and Corresponding Name
Fan Number Name of the Fan
1 (not used)
2 Lower System Fan
3 Upper System Fan
4 PCI Card Fan
5 Turbo Cooler Fan, CPU
6 Disk/Memory Fan
WRN D014 SYS BD
fan 4: failure!
WRN D025 SYS BD
fan 5: too slow!
56 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
LCD Fan Failures and Warnings
Figure 3-5. Fan Locations
In the case of a fan problem, you will need to replace:
• The fan itself, if it is either a system board cooling fan, PCI (I/O) fan, or a memory fan.
• The entire system board tray assembly, if it is a turbo cooler fan (that is, a fan mounted
on a PA-8500 or PA-8700 microprocessor on the system board)
See Chapter 4 , “Field Replaceable Units,” for the procedures you should follow to remove
and replace these components.
PCI Card Fan (4)
Memory Fan
Upper System
Fan (2)
Lower System
Fan (3) (6)
Turbo Cooler
Fan (5)
Chapter 3 57
Troubleshooting
Dealing with a Boot Failure
Dealing with a Boot Failure
To start this workstation from an operating system stored on a device different from the
usual boot device, to boot from a different disk, or to boot from another type of device (such
as DDS tape drive, an alternate hard disk or CD), see the following situations and
examples that use the Boot Console Handler. To access the Boot Console Handler, see
Chapter 6 of this manual.
• To boot from a known device containing a bootable operating system, type the following
at the prompt and press Enter:
Main Menu: Enter a command or a menu > boot device
where device is the hardware path to the device, specified in Mnemonic Style Notation
For example, to boot an operating system stored on a DDS-format tape in a drive
located at “scsi.1.0,” go to the Main Menu of the Boot Console Interface and then type
the following command at the prompt and press Enter:
Main Menu: Enter a command > boot scsi.1.0
The operating system on the specified device is used to start the workstation.
• To interact with the Initial System Loader (ISL) before booting the workstation, type
the following at the prompt and press Enter:
Main Menu: Enter a command or a menu > boot <device>
You are prompted: Interact with ISL (Y or N) > y
Answering yes (y) causes the ISL to be loaded from the specified device. After a short
time, the following prompt appears on the screen:
ISL>
ISL is the program that actually controls the loading of the operating system. By
interacting with ISL, you can choose to load an alternate version of the HP-UX
operating system.
For example, if the usual kernel (/stand/vmunix for HP-UX 10.20, 11.0 or 11i) on the
root disk (fwscsi.6.0) has become corrupted, boot the workstation from the backup
kernel (/stand/vmunix.prev for HP-UX 10.20, 11.0 or 11i) by typing the following at
the ISL> prompt and press Enter:
ISL> hpux /stand/vmunix.prev
• To find the location of the bootable operating systems on the various media in the file
system, use the search ipl command.
58 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Dealing with a Boot Failure
Searching for Bootable Media
To list all devices that may contain bootable media, go to the Main Menu of the Boot
Console Interface and then type the following at the prompt:
Main Menu: Enter a command or a menu > search ipl
The search may turn up more devices than there are lines on the display. If using a text
terminal, you can control the progress of the search from the terminal’s keyboard by
performing the following steps:
• To hold the display temporarily, press Ctrl S
• To continue the display, press Ctrl Q
• To halt the search, press Esc
These flow-control commands do not work with a bitmapped display, but such a display can
show more than forty lines of text, so they are unnecessary.
To search for devices of just one type that actually contain bootable media, go to the Main
Menu of the Boot Console Interface and then type the following at the prompt:
Main Menu: Enter a command > search ipl device_type
where device_type is one of the following:
•fwscsi is the built-in fast, Ultra2 Wide LVD (Low Voltage Differential) SCSI bus.
•scsi is the built-in single-ended SCSI bus.
•lan is all connections to the built-in LAN.
•ide is the built-in CD-ROM drive.
•pci
n
is an optional SCSI interface in slot number
n
.
Stable Storage
Stable Storage is non-volatile memory associated with each PA-RISC processor module.
Stable storage is used by the processor (CPU) to store device path information, the state of
the boot flags, HPMC error information, and operating system initialization data.
Chapter 3 59
Troubleshooting
Dealing with a Boot Failure
Boot Command Notations
The boot command supports the following two notations:
• Mnemonic
• Path number
Type help scsi or help lan for more information on the boot path parameters.
Here are examples of mnemonic notation:
•boot with “no parameters” selects the primary boot path in stable storage.
•boot with the alternate or alt parameters selects the alternate boot path in stable
storage.
Here is an example of path number notation:
•boot p1 [Enter] attempts to boot from the second path in a list generated by a previous
search command.
Supported Boot Paths
SCSI devices are bootable when connected to the SCSI port on the system. Diskless
workstations can only boot from the LAN port on the system board. The workstation can
be booted from the CD-ROM for software installation.
ISL Environment
The ISL environment provides the means to load the operating system (HP-UX)
environment. The ISL environment also provides an off-line platform to execute diagnostic
and utility programs from a boot device when HP-UX does not load.
The ISL program is the first program loaded into main memory from an external media
(LAN, disk, or tape) and launched by the initial program loader (IPL) routine during the
Boot Administration environment.
The ISL environment provides the following capabilities:
• Execute user-entered commands to modify boot device paths and boot options in stable
storage.
• Run off-line diagnostic programs and utilities.
• Provide automatic booting of the HP-UX operating system after power-on or reset.
The ISL program provides a stand-alone environment for loading off-line diagnostic and
utility programs from the LIF directory. The ISL program also provides user commands to
configure the boot parameters into Stable Storage.
60 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
Selftest Failures
Chassis codes are the key to debugging selftest errors. If a failure is found during selftest,
chassis codes are displayed in the LCD. The procedure for using these codes to debug a
failure is as follows:
1. Using Table 3-2., “Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations,” find the chassis code
listed on the LCD.
2. To get additional information about failures from the Boot Console Handler, use the
Service Menu’s pim,pdt, and ChassisCodes commands.
In the following table, the FRU column shows messages printed on the LCD that refer to
system FRUs. Only FLT codes have FRUs associated with them. Some WRN codes are also
device specific, especially to IODC calls; for example, 8xxx codes. TST and INI codes do not
necessarily correspond to any FRU. All codes are listed in numeric order.
Chapter 3 61
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
Chassis Codes
Table 3-2. lists all of the chassis codes for the B1000 and C3000 workstations.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
FLT 1n01 SYS BD HPMC occurred CPU n detected an unexpected HPMC.
FLT 1n02 SYS BD powerfail intrpt CPU n detected an unexpected power fail
interrupt.
FLT 1n03 SYS BD recvry cntr trap CPU n detected an unexpected recovery
counter trap.
FLT 1n04 SYS BD external intrrpt CPU n detected an unexpected external
interrupt.
FLT 1n05 SYS BD LPMC occurred CPU n detected an unexpected LPMC.
FLT 1n06 SYS BD ITLB mis/Ipg flt CPU ndetected an unexpected ITLB miss
or instruction page fault.
FLT 1n07 SYS BD I mem prot trap CPU n detected an unexpected instruction
memory protection trap.
FLT 1n08 SYS BD illegal inst trp CPU n detected an unexpected illegal
instruction trap.
FLT 1n09 SYS BD break instr trap CPU n detected an unexpected break
instruction trap.
FLT 1n0A SYS BD privilgd op trap CPU n detected an unexpected privileged
operation trap.
FLT 1n0B SYS BD privlgd reg trap CPU n detected an unexpected privileged
register trap.
FLT 1n0C SYS BD overflow trap CPU n detected an unexpected overflow
trap.
FLT 1n0D SYS BD conditional trap CPU n detected an unexpected conditional
trap.
FLT 1n0E SYS BD assist exep trap CPU n detected an unexpected assist
exception trap.
FLT 1n0F SYS BD DTLB mis/Dpg flt CPU n detected an unexpected DTLB
miss or data page fault.
FLT 1n10 SYS BD non-acc ITLB mis CPU n detected an unexpected non-access
ITLB miss fault.
FLT 1n11 SYS BD non-acc DTLB mis CPU n detected an unexpected non-access
DTLB miss or data page fault.
FLT 1n12 SYS BD data mem prot tr CPU n detected an unexpected data
memory protection trap.
62 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
FLT 1n13 SYS BD data mem brk trp CPU n detected an unexpected data
memory break trap.
FLT 1n14 SYS BD TLB dirty bit tr CPU n detected an unexpected TLB dirty
bit trap.
FLT 1n15 SYS BD page refrnce trp CPU n detected an unexpected page
reference trap.
FLT 1n16 SYS BD assist emul trap CPU n detected an unexpected assist
emulation trap.
FLT 1n17 SYS BD hi-priv xfer trp CPU n detected an unexpected
higher-privilege transfer trap.
FLT 1n18 SYS BD lo-priv xfer trp CPU n detected an unexpected
lower-privilege transfer trap.
FLT 1n19 SYS BD taken branch trp CPU n detected an unexpected
taken-branch trap.
FLT 1n1A SYS BD data mem acc rts CPU n detected an unexpected data
memory access rights trap.
FLT 1n1B SYS BD data mem prot ID CPU n detected an unexpected data
memory protection ID trap.
FLT 1n1C SYS BD unalign data ref CPU n detected an unexpected unaligned
data reference trap.
FLT 1n1D SYS BD perf mon intrrpt CPU n detected an unexpected
performance monitor interrupt.
TST 1n20 SYS BD CPU
n
basic test CPU n is starting its basic operations
self-test.
TST 1n21 SYS BD CPU
n
alu test CPU n is starting its arithmetic and
logical unit self-test.
TST 1n22 SYS BD CPU
n
branch test CPU n is starting its branch instruction
self-test.
TST 1n23 SYS BD CPU
n
arith cond CPU n is starting its arthimetic condition
self-test.
TST 1n24 SYS BD CPU
n
bit opers CPU n is starting its bit operation
instruction self-test.
TST 1n25 SYS BD CPU
n
cntrl regs CPU n is starting its control register
self-test.
TST 1n26 SYS BD CPU
n
ext intrpt CPU n is starting its external interrupt
self-test.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
Chapter 3 63
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
TST 1n27 SYS BD CPU
n
itimer test CPU n is starting its interval timer
self-test.
TST 1n28 SYS BD CPU
n
multi-media CPU n is starting its multi-media
instructions self-test.
TST 1n29 SYS BD CPU
n
shadow reg CPU n is starting its shadow register
self-test.
TST 1n2A SYS BD CPU
n
diagnse reg CPU n is starting its diagnose register
self-test.
TST 1n2B SYS BD CPU
n
rdr test CPU n is starting its remote diagnose
register self-test.
TST 1n2C SYS BD CPU
n
bypass test CPU n is starting its integer bypass
operation self-test.
TST 1n30 SYS BD CPU
n
start est CPU n is starting its early (pre-memory)
self-tests.
WRN 1n31 SYS BD CPU
n
skip est CPU n is bypassing its early self-tests to
save time.
FLT 1n32 SYS BD CPU
n
bad tst mod CPU n detected an unsupported system
mode.
INI 1n3C SYS BD CPU
n
initialize CPU n is initializing after self-tests.
TST 1n3E SYS BD CPU
n
exit est CPU n finished its early self-tests.
TST 1nA0 SYS BD CPU
n
fpu tests CPU n is starting its floating-point unit
self-tests.
TST 1nA1 SYS BD CPU
n
fpu reg tst CPU n is starting its floating-point
register self-test.
TST 1nA2 SYS BD CPU
n
fpu inst CPU n is starting its floating-point
instruction self-test.
TST 1nA3 SYS BD CPU
n
fpu traps CPU n is starting its floating-point trap
self-test.
TST 1nA4 SYS BD CPU
n
fpu misc CPU n is starting its floating-point
miscellaneous operations self-test.
TST 1nA5 SYS BD CPU
n
fpu bypass CPU n is starting its floating-point
bypassing self-test.
TST 1nB1 SYS BD CPU
n
TLB RAM tst CPU n is starting its TLB register
self-test.
TST 1nB2 SYS BD CPU
n
TLB trans CPU n is starting its TLB translation
self-test.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
64 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
FLT 1nBA SYS BD monarch CPU
fail
The monarch CPU failed.
FLT 1nBB SYS BD bad CPU
n
number The CPU identifier was out of range.
FLT 1nBF SYS BD CPU
n
halt boot Bootstrap failure--machine halted.
INI 1nCA SYS BD CPUn sys bus arb Monarch CPU is initializing the system
bus arbitration.
WRN 1nCD SYS BD CPU
n
deconfig CPU n deconfigured itself.
WRN 1nCE SYS BD CPU
n
extinguish PDC_PROC halted CPU n.
FLT 1nCF SYS BD slave
n
failed Slave CPU n failed self-test.
WRN 1mDs SYS BD slaves deconfig Monarch CPU m deconfigured slave CPU
s.
WRN 1nEF SYS BD CPU
n
slftst warn CPU n detected a non-fatal error during
its self-tests.
WRN 1mFs SYS BD mon
m
stop slave
s
Monarch CPU m halted slave CPU s.
INI 1nFC SYS BD CPUn sync’ing CPU n is synchronizing with the rest of
the system.
INI 1nFD SYS BD CPU
n
stat wd tst CPU n is testing the system status word.
FLT 1nFF SYS BD monarch
n
selftst Monarch CPU n failed self-test.
TST 2n20 SYS BD CPU
n
icache RAM CPU n is starting its instruction cache
RAM self-test.
FLT 2n25 SYS BD CPU
n
ic ld d err CPU n detected a data error during data
cache load.
FLT 2n26 SYS BD CPU
n
ic ld t err CPU n detected a tag error during data
cache load.
TST 2n30 SYS BD CPU
n
icache tag CPU n is starting its instruction cache tag
self-test.
TST 2n40 SYS BD CPU
n
icache par CPU n is starting its instruction cache
parity detection self-test.
TST 2n50 SYS BD CPU
n
dc stor que CPU n is starting its data cache store
queue self-test.
FLT 2n51 SYS BD CPU
n
dc st q err CPU n detected an error during its data
cache store queue self-test.
TST 2n70 SYS BD CPU
n
dcache RAM CPU n is starting its data cache RAM
self-test.
TST 2n80 SYS BD CPU
n
dcache tag CPU n is starting its data cache tag
self-test.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
Chapter 3 65
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
TST 2n90 SYS BD CPU
n
dcache ECC CPU n is starting its data cache ECC
self-test.
FLT 2BAD SYS BD assertion fail A firmware assertion failed.
TST 3n00 SYS BD ROM checksum tst Monarch CPU n is testing the boot ROM
integrity.
FLT 3n00 SYS BD ROM checksum BAD The boot ROM failed checksum.
INI 3n00 SYS BD ROM checksum ok The boot ROM passed checksum.
TST 3n01 SYS BD PDH control test Monarch CPU n is testing PDH control
register.
INI 3n01 SYS BD PDH control init Monarch CPU n is initializing the PDH
control register.
FLT 3n01 SYS BD PDH control err Monarch CPU n detected an error in the
PDH control register.
TST 3n02 SYS BD scratch RAM test Monarch CPU n is testing scratch RAM.
INI 3n02 SYS BD scratch RAM ok The scratch RAM test failed.
FLT 3n02 SYS BD scratch RAM bad The scratch RAM test passed.
WRN 3n03 SYS BD stbl st read err CPU n detected a non-fatal error reading
the stable store.
FLT 3n03 SYS BD stbl st read err CPU n detected a non-fatal error reading
the stable store.
INI 3nC4 SYS BD clearing EEPROM Monarch CPU n is clearing the EEPROM.
INI 3nD4 SYS BD deflting EEPROM2 Monarch CPU n is initializing the
EEPROM to system defaults.
WRN 3n04 SYS BD EEPROM write err CPU n detected a non-fatal error writing
the EEPROM.
FLT 3n04 SYS BD EEPROM write err CPU n detected a fatal error writing the
EEPROM.
FLT 3n05 SYS BD EEPROM wrt limit CPU n detected a fatal error writing the
EEPROM.
WRN 3n06 SYS BD EEPROM read err CPU n detected a non-fatal error reading
the EEPROM.
FLT 3n06 SYS BD EEPROM read err CPU n detected a fatal error reading the
EEPROM.
INI 3n07 SYS BD CPUn invoke LDB CPU n is starting the low-level debugger.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
66 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
FLT 3n09 SYS BD bad sys mde byte CPU n detected an unsupported system
mode.
WRN 3n1A SYS BD hversion mismtch Stable store hardware version doesn’t
match system.
TST 3n1B SYS BD chck model strng Check model string with version in stable
store.
WRN 3n1B SYS BD model str msmtch Model string doesn’t match that in stable
store.
FLT 3n1B SYS BD fatal model str Error reading model string from stable
store.
TST 3n1C SYS BD test software ID Check LANIC address.
WRN 3n1C SYS BD update sw ID Update LANIC address.
FLT 3n1C SYS BD update sw ID err Error updating LANIC address.
INI 3n2s SYS BD Invoke LDB: s CPU n is awaiting the low-level debugger
for s more seconds.
FLT 3nBC IO BD tick timeout The real-time clock is ticking too slowly or
not at all.
TST 3nBC IO BD test sys clocks CPU n is verifying processor clocks with
the real-time clock.
INI 3nBC SYS BD init sys clocks CPU n has initialized the processor clocks.
FLT 3nCD IO BD RTC tick timeout The real time clock is ticking too slowly or
not at all.
TST 3nCD SYS BD check defaults CPU nis initializing stable store values to
system defaults.
INI 3nCD SYS BD init defaults CPU n finished initializing stable store
values.
FLT 3nCD SYS BD init EEPROM err CPU n detected an error writing to stable
store.
FLT 3nEC SYS BD bad sys config CPU n detected an illegal CPU board
configuration.
FLT 3nF4 SYS BD EEPROM boot limt CPU n detected a fatal error writing the
EEPROM.
FLT 3nFC SYS BD bad sys bd id CPU n cannot identify CPU board.
TST 4n00 SYS BD CPU
n
start lst CPU n is starting its late (with memory)
self-tests.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
Chapter 3 67
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
WRN 4n01 SYS BD CPU
n
skip lst CPU n is bypassing its late self-tests to
save time.
TST 4n0E SYS BD CPU
n
exit lst CPU n finished its late self-tests.
TST 4n20 SYS BD CPU
n
lst erly st CPU n is re-executing some of its early
self-tests from system memory.
TST 4n21 SYS BD CPU
n
lst basic CPU n is re-executing its basic operations
self-test.
TST 4n22 SYS BD CPU
n
lst alu CPU n is re-executing its arithmetic and
logic unit self-test.
TST 4n23 SYS BD CPU
n
lst branch CPU n is re-executing its branch
instruction self-test.
TST 4n24 SYS BD CPU
n
lst arth cd CPU n is re-executing its arithmetic
conditions self-test.
TST 4n25 SYS BD CPU
n
lst bit ops CPU n is re-executing its bit operations
self-test.
TST 4n26 SYS BD CPU
n
lst ctl reg CPU n is re-executing its control register
self-test.
TST 4n27 SYS BD CPU
n
lst ext int CPU n is re-executing its external
interrupt self-test.
TST 4n28 SYS BD CPU
n
lst itimer CPU n is re-executing its interval timer
self-test.
TST 4n29 SYS BD CPU
n
lst mltimed CPU n is re-executing its multi-media
instructions self-test.
TST 4n2A SYS BD CPU
n
lst shadow CPU n is re-executing its shadow register
self-test.
TST 4n2B SYS BD CPU
n
lst dg regs CPU n is re-executing its diagnose
register self-test.
TST 4n2C SYS BD CPU
n
lst rdrs CPU n is re-executing its remote diagnose
register self-test.
TST 4n2D SYS BD CPU
n
lst bypass CPU n is re-executing its integer bypass
operation self-test.
TST 4n30 SYS BD CPU
n
cache byte CPU n is starting its data cache sub-word
operations self-test.
TST 4n40 SYS BD CPU
n
cache flush CPU n is starting its cache flush self-test.
TST 4n50 SYS BD CPU
n
icache miss CPU n is starting its instruction cache
miss self-test.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
68 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
TST 4n60 SYS BD CPU
n
dcache miss CPU n is starting its data cache miss
self-test.
FLT 5n00 SYS BD unknown bus err CPU n detected an unknown error on the
system bus (Runway).
FLT 5n02 SYS BD path err assertd CPU n detected a path error on the
system bus (Runway).
FLT 5n04 SYS BD data parity err CPU n detected a data, address, or control
parity error on the system bus (Runway).
FLT 5n07 SYS BD Runway dir error CPU n detected a directed error on the
system bus (Runway).
FLT 5n08 SYS BD Runway broad err CPU n detected a broadcast error on the
system bus (Runway).
FLT 5n0A SYS BD illegal response CPU n received data that did not match
any outstanding data request.
FLT 5n0B SYS BD bus timeout CPU n timed out before receiving
requested data. The responder is logged in
the system responder address.
FLT 5n0C SYS BD CPU sync failure CPU n’s synchronizer detected a rule
violation on the system bus (Runway).
INI 7000 DIMM start DIMM scan Start looking for installed DIMMs.
INI 7002 SYS BD init mem tables Initialize memory data structures.
FLT 7004 SYS BD mem plt upd fail Error updating memory platform data.
FLT 7005 DIMM insufficient mem Insufficient memory detected to continue.
TST 7010 DIMM check DIMM order Start memory DIMM order check.
WRN 7011 DIMM skip DIMM ord ck Bypass memory DIMM order check.
FLT 7012 DIMM DIMM order error Memory DIMMs are not in the proper
order.
FLT 7013 DIMM DIMM order error Memory DIMMs are not in the proper
order. As a result, the system cannot
access one or more DIMMs and has
deallocated all inaccessible DIMMs.
TST 7016 DIMM DIMM pair check Start memory DIMM pair check (DIMMs
in a pair (e.g. 0a/0b) must match in
J7000).
WRN 7017 DIMM skip mem pair ck Bypass memory DIMM set check.
FLT 701F DIMM no memory found Memory scan couldn’t find any DIMMs.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
Chapter 3 69
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
TST 7020 SYS BD search for IMM Try to find a single memory bank to use
for the initial memory module.
TST 703s DIMM DIMM
s
IMM vrfy DIMM s was the initial memory module
last boot. Verify it still works.
FLT 704s DIMM DIMM s IMM fail DIMM s failed the initial memory module
test.
TST 705s DIMM DIMM s IMM test Test DIMM in slot s as the initial memory
module.
INI 706s DIMM DIMM s is IMM DIMM s chosen as initial memory module.
INI 70F0 DIMM DIMM scan done Memory DIMM scan complete.
TST 7100 SYS BD mem register tst Start testing registers in memory
controller.
WRN 7101 SYS BD skip mem reg tst Bypass the memory controller register
test.
FLT 7102 SYS BD mem addr reg tst Firmware detected an error in the
memory controller address registers.
FLT 7103 SYS BD mem mbat reg tst Firmware detected an error in the
memory controller bank registers.
FLT 7104 SYS BD mem reg tst fail Firmware detected an error in the
memory controller memory registers.
FLT 7105 SYS BD mem err reg test Firmware detected an error in the
memory controller error registers.
FLT 7106 SYS BD mem err clr fail Firmware was unable to clear the error
registers after testing.
INI 7200 DIMM strt DIMM detect Start the Serial Presence Detection (SPD)
to search for memory DIMMs.
INI 7201 DIMM DIMM detect
x
%SPD is x% finished.
WRN 7202 SYS BD skip DIMM detect Bypass Serial Presence Detection.
FLT 7203 DIMM unsupp DIMM type SPD found an unsupported DIMM type.
FLT 7204 DIMM SPD fatal error SPD detected an unexpected, fatal error.
INI 7205 DIMM add HP DIMM type New HP manufactured DIMM type added
to tables.
INI 7206 DIMM non-HP DIMM type New non-HP DIMM type added to tables
(use at own risk).
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
70 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
FLT 7207 DIMM DIMM table full The DIMM table is full--cannot add new
type.
FLT 7208 DIMM no DIMMs found SPD didn’t find any memory DIMMs.
INI 721s DIMM is DIMM
s
inst? SPD is checking memory slot s.
INI 722s DIMM ???? DIMM in
s
SPD found a DIMM in slot s, but can’t
determine its size. DIMM will not be used.
INI 723s DIMM 128M DIMM in
s
SPD found a 128MB DIMM in slot s.
INI 724s DIMM 256M DIMM in
s
SPD found a 256MB DIMM in slot s.
INI 725s DIMM 512M DIMM in
s
SPD found a 512MB DIMM in slot s.
FLT 72As DIMM DIMM
s
checksum DIMM in slot s failed SPD checksum and
will not be used.
FLT 72Cs DIMM DIMM
s
mismatch DIMM in slot s didn’t match the other in
pair. (J7000 only--DIMMs must be in
matched pairs.)
FLT 72D
s
DIMM DIMM
s
load err Memory DIMMs are not in the proper
order. As a result, the system cannot
access DIMM s and has deallocated it.
INI 7300 SYS BD mem config start Starting main memory configuration.
TST 7301 SYS BD check mem config Checking for memory configuration
change since last boot.
WRN 7302 SYS BD mem confg changd Memory physical configuration changed
since last boot.
INI 7303 SYS BD use saved config Memory physical configuration didn’t
change. Use stored configuration data.
INI 7304 SYS BD build mem intrlv Building memory configuration with all
DIMMs interleaved.
INI 7305 SYS BD save mem config Saving memory configuration information
in non-volatile memory.
WRN 7306 SYS BD use alt mem conf Memory will be configured from fixed
values, instead of detected DIMMs.
INI 7307 SYS BD interleve memory Generating the memory interleave.
FLT 7308 SYS BD PDT is disabled Firmware detected bad memory pages,
but the Page Deallocation Table is
disabled.
FLT 7309 DIMM insufficient mem Insufficient error-free memory to
continue.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
Chapter 3 71
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
FLT 730C SYS BD mem intrlv fail Memory interleave generation failed.
INI 730F SYS BD mem config done Main memory configuration complete.
TST 7400 DIMM non-dest mem tst Starting non-destructive memory test.
TST 740F DIMM non-dst tst done Non-destructive memory test complete.
INI 7500 SYS BD memory reset Resetting memory system.
WRN 7501 SYS BD mem log clr warn Memory error logs didn’t clear on first try.
FLT 7502 SYS BD mem err log fail Firmware could not clear memory error
logs.
TST 7600 DIMM dest mem test Starting the destructive memory test.
WRN 7601 DIMM mem init only Skip the test, just initialize memory to
save time.
TST 7602 DIMM tst 1st mem page Starting 3-pass test of first memory page.
TST 7603 DIMM tst rest of mem Starting 3-pass test of the rest of memory.
TST 7604 DIMM start 1st pass Starting 1st pass of memory test (write
pseudorandom sequence).
TST 7605 DIMM 1st pass
x%
First pass is x% complete.
TST 7606 DIMM start 2nd pass Starting 2nd pass of memory test (verify
pseudorandom sequence, write inverse).
TST 7607 DIMM 2nd pass
x%
Second pass is x% complete.
TST 7608 DIMM start 3rd pass Starting 3rd pass of memory test (verify
inverse sequence).
TST 7609 DIMM 3rd pass x% Third pass is x% complete.
TST 760A DIMM start mem init Starting memory initialization. (Initialize
to zero to set ECC.)
TST 760B DIMM mem init
x%
Memory initialization is x% complete.
WRN 760C DIMM repeat dest test Re-execute destructive test for hardware
troubleshooting.
FLT 760D DIMM mem code cpy err Firmware tried to copy code from ROM to
memory, but the copy didn’t match the
original.
FLT 7610 DIMM ECC wrt/read err Writing and reading back good data
caused memory ECC error.
FLT 7611 DIMM ECC single data Memory ECC test failed to detect
single-bit data error.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
72 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
FLT 7612 DIMM ECC single ECC Memory ECC test failed to detect
single-bit ECC error.
FLT 7613 DIMM ECC multipl data Memory ECC test failed to detect
multiple-bit data error.
FLT 7614 DIMM ECC multpl signl Memory ECC test failed to signal
multiple-bit error.
FLT 7800 SYS BD mem err summary Printing memory error summary word to
RS-232.
FLT 7801 SYS BD bus ctrl par err System bus (Runway) control parity error
detected.
FLT 7802 SYS BD bus addr par err System bus (Runway) address parity error
detected.
FLT 7803 SYS BD bus data par err System bus (Runway) data parity error
detected.
FLT 7804 SYS BD mem out of range Memory access outside configured
memory space.
FLT 7805 SYS BD bus broadcst err System bus (Runway) broadcast error
detected.
FLT 7806 SYS BD mem addr par err Memory bus address parity error
detected.
FLT 7807 SYS BD mem ctlr stat wd Printing memory controller status word to
RS-232.
FLT 781s SYS BD DIMM s uncor err Uncorrectable ECC error detected in
DIMM s.
FLT 782s SYS BD DIMM s corr err Correctable ECC error detected in DIMM
s.
FLT 7840 SYS BD unexpected HPMC Unexpected HPMC detected.
FLT 7841 SYS BD mem status invld Memory error status word is invalid.
FLT 7842 SYS BD mem summ invalid Memory summary word is invalid.
FLT 7843 SYS BD fwd prog invalid Memory forward progress word is invalid.
FLT 7844 SYS BD mem HPMC summ wd Printing memory error summary word to
RS-232.
FLT 7845 SYS BD mem ctlr stat wd Printing memory controller status word to
RS-232.
FLT 7846 SYS BD mem err overflow Multiple memory errors detected.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
Chapter 3 73
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
FLT 7848 SYS BD addr not mapped Memory address outside configured
memory space.
FLT 785s DIMM MBE in DIMM
s
Destructive memory test detected an
uncorrectable memory error in DIMM s.
FLT 786s DIMM SBE&MBE DIMM
s
Destructive memory test detected both an
uncorrectable and a correctable memory
error in DIMM s.
FLT 787s DIMM mem err DIMM
s
Destructive memory test detected a
pattern compare error in DIMM s.
FLT 788s DIMM SBE in DIMM
s
Destructive memory test detected a
correctable memory error in DIMM s.
FLT 7890 DIMM MBE overwrt SBE Firmware replaced a correctable memory
error entry in the PDT with an
uncorrectable memory error entry at the
same address.
FLT 7891 DIMM dup entry in PDT The PDT already contains an entry at
that address.
FLT 7892 SYS BD PDT write error Error adding the entry to the PDT.
FLT 7893 SYS BD PDT is full The PDT is full--cannot add new entry.
FLT 7900 SYS BD no DMT entry Internal error--cannot find DIMM entry.
FLT 7901 SYS BD no rank entry Internal error--cannot find rank entry.
FLT 7902 SYS BD bad refrsh intvl Computed refresh interval is invalid.
FLT 7903 SYS BD mem intrlv fail Cannot generate memory interleave.
FLT 7904 SYS BD mem reloc failed Cannot interleave with relocated range
(3.75GB - 4.0GB).
FLT 7905 SYS BD mem intrlv error Undefined memory interleave failure.
FLT 79FF SYS BD mem firmware err Internal error--never expected this to
happen.
WRN 80F3 SYS BD err rd IODC byte Cannot read IODC from ROM or card.
WRN 80F4 EXT IO boot read error Cannot load IODC entry_init for boot
device.
WRN 80F5 EXT IO boot exec error Error initializing boot device.
WRN 80F6 EXT IO boot read error Cannot load IODC entry_io for boot
device.
WRN 80F7 EXT IO boot IO error Error detected during boot device I/O.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
74 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
WRN 80F8 EXT IO invalid boot dev Invalid boot device class; bad IODC?
WRN 80FC EXT IO invalid boot dev Unexpected error; bad IODC?
INI 8800 IOCARD PCI BusWlk start Starting PCI bus and device discovery.
INI 88
r
1 IOCARD PCI Rope r walk Starting PCI bus and device discovery on
Rope r.
INI 8802 IOCARD PCI BusWalk done PCI bus and device discovery complete.
INI 8803 SYS BD PCI alloc done Done allocating address space for PCI
devices.
INI 8804 SYS BD PCI config done Done configuring PCI devices.
FLT 881rIO BD R2PCI
r
not found Rope-to-PCI bridge r not found.
FLT 883
r
IO BD Rope
r
config
err PCI configuration failed below
Rope-to-PCI bridge r.
FLT 884r EXT IO Rope r tgl fail Rope r debug register toggle failed.
INI 8850 SYS_BD early rope0 init Initializing rope 0 for early RS-232
output.
FLT 8850 SYS_BD rope0 init fail Couldn’t initialize rope 0.
INI 8860 SYS_BD rope0 init done Rope 0 initialization complete.
INI 8870 IO_BD early R2PCI init Initializing rope-to-PCI bridge 0 for early
RS-232 output.
FLT 8870 IO_BD R2PCI init fail Couldn’t initialize rope-to-PCI bridge 0.
INI 8880 IO_BD R2PCI init done Rope-to-PCI bridge 0 initialization.
INI 8890 IO_BD early Super init Iniitalizing Super-I/O for early RS-232
output.
FLT 8890 IO_BD Super init fail Couldn’t initialize Super-I/O.
INI 88A0 IO_BD Super init done Super-I/O initialization complete.
WRN 8A03 EXT IO No graph console Cannot re-establish communications with
the graphics console.
WRN 8A04 EXT IO No USB keyboard Cannot re-establish communications with
the USB keyboard.
TST 8C06 EXT IO PCI BIST test Running PCI Built-In Self-Test
WRN 8C07 EXT IO PCI BIST error PCI Built-In Self-Test failed.
WRN 8C08 SYS BD PCI alloc error PCI address space allocation failed.
WRN 8C09 IO BD PCI mem mngr err Memory allocation for PCI device failed.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
Chapter 3 75
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
WRN 8C0A EXT IO PCI mem type err PCI device requested invalid memory
type.
WRN 8C0B IO BD PCI max bus dpth PCI bus depth exceeded maximum
supported depth.
WRN 8C0C EXT IO PCI dev not cnfg Unable to configure PCI device.
WRN 8C0F IO BD dev tree ovrflow Data space for PCI devices is full.
WRN 8DEC IO BD init LAN SROM Initializing the core LAN serial EPROM.
SHU 8DEC IO BD resetting system Restarting system after core LAN
initialization.
FLT 8E10 IO BD PARALEL port cfg Parallel port configuration failed.
FLT 8E11 IO BD SERIAL1 port cfg Serial 1 port configuration failed.
FLT 8E12 IO BD SERIAL2 port cfg Serial 2 port configuration failed.
FLT 8E13 IO BD FLOPPY drive cfg Floppy drive configuration failed.
FLT 8E20 IO BD bad USB port cfg USB port configuration failed.
WRN 9001 EXT IO no console found Search for console display device failed.
INI 9151 IO BD init SERIAL_1 Initializing serial 1 port as console
display.
INI 9152 IO BD init SERIAL_2 Initializing serial 2 port as console
display.
INI 915F IO BD init unknown dev Initializing unknown device as console
display.
INI 916s EXT IO init PCI slot
s
Initializing PCI device in slot s as console
display.
INI 91DB IO BD init SERIAL_LDB Initializing serial LDB port as console
display.
INI 9C51 IO BD consol is SER_1 Console display is on serial port 1.
WRN 9C51 IO BD bad init SERIAL1 Serial port 1 failed to initialize as a
console device.
INI 9C52 IO BD consol is SER_2 Console display is on serial port 2.
WRN 9C52 IO BD bad init SERIAL2 Serial port 2 failed to initialize as a
console device.
INI 9C6s EXT IO consol is GRAPH
s
Console display is on graphics card in PCI
slot s.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
76 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
WRN 9C6s EXT IO bad PCI slot
s
Graphics in PCI slot s failed to initialize
as a console device.
INI 9C8t EXT IO cnfg mon type
t
Set graphics console to monitor type t.
(Seen when cycling through types.)
WRN 9C8t EXT IO mon type t fail Failed to configure console to monitor type
t.
INI 9CDB IO BD consl is SER_LDB Console display is on serial LDB port.
WRN 9CDB IO BD bad init SER_LDB Serial LDB port failed to initialize as a
console device.
FLT A088 IO BD consl path fault Unable to boot--no console device found.
WRN A008 EXT IO no boot device Unable to boot--no bootable device found.
WRN A0BD EXT IO device not ready Boot device not ready--operation may be
retried.
FLT A0FF EXT IO unknown launch Unable to boot. Explanation may appear
on console.
WRN A50F EXT IO init pri pth err Unable to boot from primary boot device.
WRN A70F EXT IO init otr pth err Unable to boot from non-primary boot
device.
INI C10m SYS BD CPUm is monarch CPU m was chosen as the monarch
processor. (All other CPUs are slaves.)
INI C30m SYS BD monarchm test CPU m finished the monarch-only tests
and system initialization.
INI C30C SYS BD mnrch slv chck The monarch CPU is checking whether
the slaves are in the correct rendezvous.
INI C3FF SYS/IO late monarch tst The monarch CPU is starting the late
(post-memory) monarch-only tests.
FLT C3FF SYS/IO late monarch flt The late (post-memory) monarch-only
tests failed.
INI C4CC SYS BD initialize ccp Searching for (lab-only) debugger card.
INI C4CD SYS BD no ccp found Debugger card not found.
INI C4CE SYS BD ccp disabled Debugger card disabled.
INI C4CF SYS BD ccp found Debugger card found.
INI C500 SYS BD get primary path Autoboot is reading primary boot path
from stable store.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
Chapter 3 77
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
INI C540 EXT IO init pri path Autoboot is trying to boot from primary
boot device.
INI C580 EXT IO load IPL pri pth Loading IPL from primary boot device.
WRN C5F0 EXT IO err read pri IPL Error loading IPL from primary boot
device.
FLT C5F0 EXT IO pri IPL fault Error loading IPL from primary boot
device.
WRN C5F1 EXT IO err read pri IPL Cannot load IPL from primary boot
device--load address invalid.
WRN C5F2 EXT IO err read pri IPL Cannot load IPL from primary boot
device--file is not IPL image.
WRN C5F3 EXT IO err read pri IPL Cannot load IPL from primary boot
device--IPL image size invalid.
WRN C5F4 EXT IO err read pri IPL Cannot load IPL from primary boot
device--IPL entry point address invalid.
WRN C5F8 EXT IO err read pri IPL Cannot load IPL from primary boot
device--IPL image checksum failed.
INI C5FF <blank> launch pri IPL Booting from primary boot path.
INI C642 EXT IO init kybrd consl Try to initialize USB keyboard.
FLT C642 EXT IO kybd error An error was detected trying to access the
keyboard.
WRN C643 EXT IO keyboard reinit Keyboard was re-initialized.
WRN C64F EXT IO reset montr type The console device failed to initialize with
the given monitor type. Try again with
type 1.
TST C68s SYS BD test graph in
s
Look for graphics card in PCI slot s.
INI C68s SYS BD init graph in s Successfully initialized graphics card in
PCI slot s.
WRN C68s SYS BD fail graph in
s
Card in PCI slot s failed graphics
initialization or is not a graphics card.
INI C740 EXT IO init other path Autoboot is trying to boot from
non-primary boot device.
INI C780 EXT IO ld IPL othr path Loading IPL from non-primary boot
device.
WRN C7F0 EXT IO other IPL fault Error loading IPL from non-primary boot
device.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
78 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
WRN C7F1 EXT IO bad alt IPL read Cannot load IPL from non-primary boot
device--load address invalid.
WRN C7F2 EXT IO bad alt IPL read Cannot load IPL from non-primary boot
device--file is not IPL image.
WRN C7F3 EXT IO bad alt IPL read Cannot load IPL from non-primary boot
device--IPL image size invalid.
WRN C7F4 EXT IO bad alt IPL read Cannot load IPL from non-primary boot
device--IPL entry point address invalid.
WRN C7F8 EXT IO bad alt IPL read Cannot load IPL from non-primary boot
device--IPL image checksum failed.
WRN C7FF <blank> launch IPL other Booting from a device other than the
primary boot path.
INI CB00 SYS BD TOC initiated A Transfer of Control entered the
firmware TOC handler.
WRN CB01 SYS BD no OS TOC vector There is no TOC vector for the operating
system. Firmware will soft boot the
system.
WRN CB02 SYS BD bad OS TOC addr The operating system TOC handler vector
is invalid. Firmware will soft boot the
system.
WRN CB03 SYS BD bad OS TOC code The operating system TOC handler is
invalid. Firmware will soft boot the
system.
WRN CB04 SYS BD bad OS TOC len The size of the operating system TOC
handler is invalid. Firmware will soft boot
the system.
WRN CB05 SYS BD bad OS TOC chksm The operating system TOC handler failed
the checksum test. Firmware will soft boot
the system.
WRN CB0A SYS BD prev TOC logged Firmware detected unread PIM data from
a previous TOC and will not overwrite it.
(PIM for this TOC is lost.)
INI CB0B SYS BD branch to OS TOC Branching to the operating system TOC
handler.
WRN CB0C SYS BD br OS TOC failed Branch to the operating system TOC
handler failed. Firmware will soft boot the
system.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
Chapter 3 79
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
WRN CB10 SYS BD LPMC initiated A Low-Priority Machine Check entered
the firmware LPMC handler. The handler
should log the error and return to normal
operation.
WRN CB11 SYS BD icache LPMC err An instruction cache parity error caused
the LPMC.
WRN CB12 SYS BD dcache LPMC err A data cache parity/ECC error caused the
LPMC.
WRN CB13 SYS BD dcache tag error The parity error is in the tag portion of
the data cache.
WRN CB14 SYS BD dcache data err The parity error is in the data portion of
the data cache.
FLT CB1F SYS BD OS LPMC failed Firmwarecouldn’t branchtothe operating
system LPMC handler. It will halt the
CPU, requiring a power cycle to recover.
WRN CB71 SYS BD HPMC occurred A High-Priority Machine Check caused
entry to PDCE_CHECK (the firmware
trap handler).
WRN CB72 SYS BD LPMC occurred A Low-Priority Machine Check caused
entry to PDCE_CHECK (the firmware
trap handler).
WRN CB73 SYS BD TOC occurred A Transfer of Control caused entry to
PDCE_CHECK (the firmware trap
handler).
FLT CB9r IO BD Error on roper An error was detected on rope r.
FLT CB99 SYS BD seed IVA handler PDC_SEED_ERROR triggered an HPMC.
FLT CB9A SYS BD HPMC overwrite Firmware is overwriting PIM data from a
previous HPMC.
OFF CBA1 SYS BD AIOC int dat err I/O controller internal error.
OFF CBA2 IO BD EtoA rope perr Parity error between I/O controller and
Rope-to-PCI bridge.
OFF CBA3 SYS BD access invld TLB An invalid I/O TLB entry was accessed.
OFF CBA4 IO BD EtoA rp cmd perr Command parity error between I/O
controller and Rope-to-PCI bridge.
OFF CBA5 IO BD CDF timeout Rope Command/Data FIFO is backed up.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
80 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
OFF CBA6 IO BD R2PCI resp tmout Rope-to-PCI bridge timed out. Could be a
failure of the PCI card, rope, or R2PCI
bridge.
OFF CBA7 IO BD Unknown AIOC err Unknown I/O controller error.
OFF CBB1 IO BD PCI timeout A PCI card requested the bus but failed to
use it.
OFF CBB2 IO BD PCI timeout; OV More than once aPCI card requested the
bus but failed to use it.
OFF CBB3 IO BD R2PCI intrnl err Rope-to-PCI bridge internal error.
OFF CBB4 IO BD R2PCI int err;OV Multiple Rope-to-PCI bridge internal
errors.
OFF CBB6 IO BD PCI data req err PCI bus data requestor error: R2PCI
detected PERR# assertion.
OFF CBB8 IO BD PCI D req err;OV Rope-to-PCI bridge detected multiple
PERR# assertions.
OFF CBBA IO BD PCI data par err PCI bus data parity error.
OFF CBBC IO BD PCI Dpar err;OV Multiple PCI bus data parity errors.
OFF CBBE IO BD R2PCI intrnl err Error in R2PCI internal data to PCI bus.
OFF CBC0 IO BD R2PCI int err;OV Multiple R2PCI internal data to PCI bus
errors.
OFF CBC2 IO BD PCI data parity PCI data parity error. I/O error log word 3
contains the error address.
OFF CBC4 IO BD PCI data par; OV Multiple PCI data parity errors. I/O error
log word 3 contains the error address.
OFF CBC6 IO BD R2PCI intrnl err Rope-to-PCI bridge internal data error:
R2PCI detected PERR# assertion.
OFF CBC8 IO BD R2PCI int err;OV Multiple R2PCI internal data errors:
R2PCI detected multiple PERR#
assertions.
OFF CBCA IO BD PCI data rs err PCI bus data responder error: R2PCI
detected PERR# assertion.
OFF CBCC IO BD PCI D rs err; OV Multiple PCI bus data responder errors:
R2PCI detected multiple PERR#
assertions.
OFF CBCE IO BD R2PCI T-Abort Rope-to-PCI bridge signalled Target
Abort.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
Chapter 3 81
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
OFF CBD0 IO BD R2PCI T-Abort;OV Rope-to-PCI bridge signalled multiple
Target Aborts.
OFF CBD2 IO BD PCI parity err PCI address/command parity error.
OFF CBD4 IO BD PCI par err; OV Multiple PCI address/command parity
errors.
OFF CBD6 IO BD PCI no DEVSEL# No PCI device selected (DEVSEL#
assertion). I/O error log word 3 contains
the error address.
OFF CBD8 IO BD PCI no DEVSEL;OV Multiple DEVSEL# assertions. I/O error
log word 3 contains the error address.
OFF CBDA IO BD PCI target abort A PCI device signalled Target Abort. I/O
error log word 3 contains the error
address.
OFF CBDC IO BD PCI T-Abort; OV A PCI device signalled multiple Target
Aborts. I/O error log word 3 contains the
error address.
OFF CBDD IO BD PCI assrts LOCK# A PCI device asserted LOCK#.
OFF CBDE IO BD PCI LOCK#; OV A PCI device asserted LOCK# multiple
times.
OFF CBE0 IO BD PCI assrts SERR# A PCI device asserted SERR#: address
parity error or other system error.
OFF CBE2 IO BD PCI SERR#; OV A PCI device asserted SERR# multiple
times.
OFF CBE3 IO BD Unknown PCI err Unknown PCI error detected.
OFF CBE6 SYS BD AtoE rope perr Parity error between system I/O controller
and Rope-to-PCI bridge.
OFF CBE7 IO BD R2PCI intrnl err Rope-to-PCI bridge internal data error.
OFF CBE8 SYS BD AtoE rope perr Command parity error between system
I/O controller and Rope-to-PCI bridge.
OFF CBE9 IO BD Unknown Rope err Unknown rope error occurred.
FLT CBF0 SYS BD HPMC initiated A High-Priority Machine Check entered
the firmware HPMC handler.
FLT CBF1 SYS BD no OS HPMC IVA There is no HPMC vector for the
operating system. Firmware will halt the
CPU, requiring a power cycle to recover.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
82 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
FLT CBF2 SYS BD bad OS HPMC len The size of the operating system HPMC
handler is invalid. Firmware will halt the
CPU, requiring a power cycle to recover.
FLT CBF3 SYS BD bad OS HPMC addr The operating system HPMC handler
vector is invalid. Firmware will halt the
CPU, requiring a power cycle to recover.
FLT CBF4 SYS BD bad OS HPMC cksm The operating system HPMC handler
failed the checksum test. Firmware will
halt the CPU, requiring a power cycle to
recover.
FLT CBF5 SYS BD OS HPMC vector 0 The size of the operating system HPMC
handler is zero. Firmware will halt the
CPU, requiring a power cycle to recover.
WRN CBFA SYS BD prev HPMC logged Firmware detected unread PIM data from
a previous HPMC and will overwrite it.
FLT CBFB SYS BD brnch to OS HPMC Branching to the operating system HPMC
handler.
FLT CBFC SYS BD OS HPMC br err Branch to the operating system HPMC
handler failed. Firmware will halt the
CPU, requiring a power cycle to recover.
FLT CBFD SYS BD unknown check The firmware trap handler didn’t detect
an HPMC, LPMC, or TOC.
FLT CBFE SYS BD HPMC during TOC A High-Priority Machine Check occurred
during Transfer of Control processing.
FLT CBFF SYS BD multiple HPMCs A High-Priority Machine Check occurred
while processing another HPMC.
INI CC0n SYS BD CPUn OS rendezvs Slave CPU n entering the final
rendezvous, waiting for the operating
system to awaken it.
INI CC1n SYS BD CPU
n
early rend Slave CPU n entering the early
rendezvous, waiting for the monarch CPU
to initialize scratch RAM and other
system state.
INI CC2n SYS BD CPU
n
rendezvous Slave CPU n entering rendezvous. Slave
CPUs enter this rendezvous numerous
times during boot.
INI CC3n SYS BD CPU
n
cache rend Slave CPU n entering cached rendezvous,
waiting for the monarch CPU to configure
the system bus.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
Chapter 3 83
Troubleshooting
Selftest Failures
Memory Failures
The B1000/C3000 system requires Memory Page Deallocation to be implemented. This
feature allows the workstation to provide information to the operating system about
memory failures.
HP-UX 10.20 or later uses information to map out failing memory areas and continue
normal operation. You can use the command memrpt with the detail switch to obtain
information about the Memory Page Deallocation Table (PDT) as well as single-bit errors
logged by the system.
# /usr/sbin/sysdiag Enter
DUI > logtool Enter
LOGTOOL> memrpt detail Enter
The PDT can also be checked using the pdt command in the Service menu of the Boot
Console Handler (refer to “Boot Console Menus” on page 159).
For allowable memory configurations see Chapter 2 of this manual.
INI CC4n SYS BD CPU
n
mem rendez Slave CPU n entering memory
rendezvous, waiting for the monarch CPU
to select a boot device.
TST D000 SYS BD micro controller Firmware is initializing communications
with the system controller.
WRN D004 SYS BD micro not resp Firmware detected a communications
error with the system controller.
INI D005 SYS BD set dom1 fan spd Firmware is initializing communications
with the system controller.
INI D006 SYS BD set dom2 fan spd Firmware is initializing communications
with the system controller.
WRN D007 SYS BD bad microctl cmd Firmware detected a communications
error with the system controller.
FLT D01n SYS/IO fan n: failure! Firmware detected system fan n stopped.
WRN D02n SYS/IO fan n: too slow! Firmware detected system fan n is
running too slowly.
Table 3-2. Chassis Codes for B1000/C3000 Workstations
Ostat Code FRU Message Description
84 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Running System Verification Tests
Running System Verification Tests
HP-UX uses an on-line diagnostics product named Mesa (Support Tools Manager) that
allows system operation verification.
Three interfaces are available with the Support Tools Manager:
• a command line interface (accessed through the cstm command)
• a menu-driven interface (accessed through the mstm command)
• a graphical user interface (accessed through the xstm command)
For more information on these user interfaces, see the on-line man pages by entering the
following at a command line prompt:
man cstm Enter
man mstm Enter
man xstm Enter
For information on the enhanced on-line diagnostics, see the enhanced on-line diagnostics,
see the Support Media User’s Manual (HP Part Number B3782-90176).
To access the Support Tools Manager, perform the following steps:
1. In a terminal window, type the following at the # prompt to invoke the command line
interface:
# cstm Enter
2. The following message appears:
Support Tools Manager Version A.01.00
Type ‘help’ for a list of available commands.
CSTM>
3. To verify the system operation, type the following at the CSTM> prompt and press Enter:
CSTM> verify all
Messages similar to the following appear:
Verification has started on device (CPU).
Verification has started on device (FPU).
CSTM> Verification of(FPU)has completed.
CSTM> Verification of(CPU) has completed.
4. Press Enter to return to the CSTM> prompt after all test results are reported.
Chapter 3 85
Troubleshooting
Running System Verification Tests
5. To exit the Support Tools Manager, enter the following:
CSTM> exit Enter
If any tests failed, run Self Test and ISL diagnostics to isolate the problem.
86 Chapter3
Troubleshooting
Running ODE-Based Diagnostics
Running ODE-Based Diagnostics
The Offline Diagnostic Environment (ODE) consists of diagnostic modules for testing and
verifying system operation. ODE provides all the necessary functions for the user to load
specified tests and interact with those tests.
ODE is an ISL utility. To boot ODE:
1. Invoke the ISL environment from the system disk or CD-ROM.
2. Type ode [Enter] after the ISL> prompt to invoke ODE from the LIF directory on the
system disk. The prompt changes to ODE>.
Not all of the test modules are available on all systems. To see what test modules are
available to run on this system, type ls at the ODE> prompt. The available modules include
the following:
•wdiag – tests and verifies the basic functionality of the PA-8500 chip. This tool tests the
CPU, cache, TLB and floating point functions.
•memtest – tests and verifies the memory arrays. If an error is detected, the diagnostic
reports the memory card and its slot number that needs replacement. It also, provides a
map of the memory configuration so that the user can identify the types of memory and
its slot location.
•mapper – identifies the configuration of HPPA systems. It displays path, identification,
and revision information of I/O components, configuration of memory controllers,
processors, co-processors, cache, and TLB, as well as processor board component
revisions and values of various HPPA system identifiers, revisions and capabilities.
•astrodiag – tests and verifies the basic functionality of the Astro memory/IO controller
chip.
•siodiag – tests and verifies the functionality of the super IO multifunction IO chip,
including serial, parallel, USB, etc.
For further information on the various ODE commands and a complete listing of the
command set, type help [Enter]attheODE> prompt or at the prompt of one of the test
modules.
87
4Field Replaceable Units
This chapter lists the HP VISUALIZE B1000/C3000 Workstation Field Replaceable Units
(FRUs) and provides procedures and illustrations showing their removal and replacement.
88 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
WARNING
For all removal and replacement procedures in this chapter, you
must power off the workstation and unplug the workstation power
cord from the AC power outlet.
NOTE
To maintain FCC/EMI compliance, verify that all covers are replaced and
that all screws are properly seated.
Use the following tools to remove or replace FRUs:
• Torx T-10 driver
• Torx T-15 driver
• Light duty flat blade screw driver with 6-inch (150mm) blade
• Needle-nose pliers
• ESD equipment (see “Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions” on page 196)
• Pen knife
NOTE
To maintain FCC/EMI compliance, verify that all covers are replaced and
that all gasket material is intact.
Figure 4-1. shows an exploded view of the internal components (FRUs) in the B1000 and
C3000 workstations.
Refer to this figure for the locations of the various workstation FRUs while performing the
FRU removal and replacement procedures in this chapter.
Chapter 4 89
Field Replaceable Units
Figure 4-1. B1000/C3000 Workstation Main Components
Power Supply
System
Memory
Cards
Fan/Speaker
Hard Disk
Drive
CD Drive
Floppy
LCD/
Air Divider
PCI Retainer
Hard Disk Drive Fan
Assembly
System
Board
Power
Switch
Chassis
Side
Panel
Fans
Carrier
Carrier
Disk Drive
Carrier
92 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
Figure 4-4. Hard Disk Drive Bracket Assembly
Figure 4-4 shows the Hard Disk Drive Bracket Assembly FRUs for the B1000/C3000
workstation.
6-32 Shoulder
Screws Drive
Mounting
Bracket
Chapter 4 93
Field Replaceable Units
Exchange and Non-exchange Part Numbers
Exchange and Non-exchange Part Numbers
In this chapter we refer to exchange and non-exchange part numbers.
You must return FRUs with exchange part numbers in exchange for a replacement FRU.
Do not return FRUs with non-exchange part numbers—you may discard them.
Each of the B1000/C3000 workstation exploded views show field replaceable units. Table
4-1 lists the exchange parts, and Table 4-2 lists the non-exchange parts in the
B1000/C3000 workstation.
94 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
Exchange and Non-exchange Part Numbers
FRUs Part Numbers
Table 4-1. Exchange Parts FRU List
Part Number Description
A4986-69012 300MHz B1000 CPU Assembly
A4986-69014 400MHz C3000 CPU Assembly
A6057-69010 750MHz C3700 CPU Assembly
A3862-69501 256 MByte SDRAM DIMM
A3860-69501 128 MByte SDRAM DIMM
A1658-69028 9GB 7200 RPM LVD Disk
A1658-69026 18GB 10K RPM Disk
A1658-69027 9GB 10K RPM Disk
A4986-69001 500W Power Supply
Chapter 4 95
Field Replaceable Units
Exchange and Non-exchange Part Numbers
Table 4-2. Non-exchange Parts FRU List
Part Number Description
A4986-66530 SCA Disk Backplane
D2035-60282 Floppy Drive
D4385-60001 32x ATAPI CD Drive
A4978-62005 SCA - drive bracket
A4978-62006 CD Drive bracket assembly
A4986-62006 Floppy Disk Drive bracket assembly
5063-4513 Speaker
A4978-62025 LCD/ Power Switch
A4978-62012 Fan- 92 mm
A4978-62013 Fan - 120 mm
A4978-68501 Fan - 80 mm - low profile
A4983-60401 USB Keyboard, United States
A4983-60101 USB Mouse, United States
A4986-63008 LVD SCSI Terminator
A1658-63012 NSE SCSI Terminator
A4986-40007 PCI Retainer Clip
A4986-62003 Front Bezel w/ CD Filler (blank)
A4986-63002 Cable - CD Signal
5182-1857 CD Audio Cable
A4986-63003 Cable - Ultra SCSI Signal
A4986-63004 Cable - Floppy Signal
A4986-63005 Floppy/CD ROM Power Cable
A4986-63006 LCD Signal Cable
A4978-62005 SCA Drive Bracket Assembly
A4986-62001 Main Chassis w/ keys, fans
A4986-00026 PCI Air Separator (Divider)
A4986-00039 Fan Bracket- Disk/Memory
0624-0727 Screw - 6-32 X 0.437 T-15 w/ slot
A4978-00039 6-32 Thumbscrew
96 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
Exchange and Non-exchange Part Numbers
0624-0727 Screw - T-15 w/ slot
1826-4269 Real Time Clock Module (internal battery)
Table 4-2. Non-exchange Parts FRU List
Part Number Description
Chapter 4 97
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
FRU Removal and Replacement
The procedures in this section describe how to remove field replaceable units (FRUs).
Observe any notices and prerequisites before removing a FRU. Replacement is the reverse
of removal, unless noted.
Before performing these procedures, observe the following precautions:
Step 1. Power off the system, the monitor, and any peripheral devices.
NOTE
There is no need to manually shutdown the HP-UX operating system on the
workstation before switching it off. When the front panel power switch is
pressed to off, the workstation automatically shuts down the operating
system before terminating the power. Wait for the system to completely
shutdown and power off before disconnecting the power cord.
CAUTION
Unplugging the power cord while HP-UX is running can damage the system
files. Do not remove the left side panel before powering down the workstation.
Remember that the left side panel is integral to the power supply safety
interlock.
Step 2. Unplug the workstation power cord and the power cord of any peripheral devices
from AC wall outlets.
Step 3. Unplug the system unit power cord from the AC input connector.
Step 4. Disconnect any external cables from the connectors on the front and rear of the
system unit.
Step 5. Attach a static-grounding wrist strap to your wrist and a location on the system
chassis that is bare metal. Attach the sticky end of the wrist strap to bare metal
on the rear panel of the workstation.
Step 6. Lay the workstation on a flat stable surface, such as a table top or floor. To protect
against scratches, remove miscellaneous debris and preferably use an ESD mat
to cushion the workstation.
CAUTION
Follow normal ESD, anti-static precautions when handling the workstation
or any of its components. Failure to do so can cause component degradation or
failure.
Step 7. If installed, remove any locking device from the security loop on the rear of the
system unit. To access the storage media, the front panel security lock must be in
the unlock position.
98 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
System Unit Front Panel
This section describes how to open and close the workstation front panel.
Opening the System Unit Front Panel
Perform the following steps to open the system unit.
1. Power off the workstation, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
2. Attach the static-grounding wrist strap by following the instructions on the package.
Attach the sticky end of the wrist strap to bare metal on the back panel of the system
unit.
3. Unlock the front panel (also known as the front bezel) by pressing in on the two latch
buttons located on the right side of the front panel. See Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-5. Opening the Front Bezel
4. Swing the panel clockwise on its left snap hinges until the panel comes free and place
the front panel in a location to avoid damage.
Closing the System Unit Front Panel
Perform the following steps to close the system unit.
1. Locate the snap hinges on the left side of the front panel, and insert them into the holes
located along the left edge of the system unit.
2. Rotate the front panel counterclockwise until you hear the two latch buttons snap in
place. The front panel is now closed. If there is a need to lock the front panel, use the
system unit keys supplied with the system to lock the panel.
Latch
Button
Front Panel
Lock
Latch
Button
Chapter 4 99
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
3. Plug in the system unit power cord, and power on the system.
Left Side Panel of the System Unit
This section explains how to open and close the left side panel of the system unit. This side
panel will have to be opened whenever you need access to the internal components of the
workstation.
Opening the Left Side Panel of the System Unit
Perform these steps to open the left side panel.
WARNING
If you remove the left side panel while the workstation is running,
the safety interlock switch will power down the workstation. Be
aware that cutting off power to the workstation via the safety
interlock does not perform a clean shutdown of the workstation.
1. Turn the computer around so the rear is facing you. On the right edge of the computer,
there are two thumbscrews with slotted T-15 Torx heads as shown in Figure 4-6.
Remove the two thumbscrews.
2. Grasp the back edge of the left side panel and rotate it outward approximately 45
degrees to the computer. Next, pull the panel toward you as shown in Figure 4-6. This
releases the panel’s left side hook hinges from their hinge slots. See Figure 4-6.
100 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-6. Opening the Left Side Panel of the System Unit
NOTE
The EMI gasket, as shown in Figure 4-6, must not be removed from the side
panel.
Safety
Interlock
Switch
T-15 Torx Thumbscrew Hinge Slot
EMI gasket
Safety
Interlock
Release
Pin
Chapter 4 101
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Closing the Left Side Panel of the System Unit
Perform these steps to close the left side panel.
NOTE
Power supply thumbscrews must be fully tightened before closing the left side
panel. Failure to tighten thumbscrews may damage the left side panel.
1. Hold the left side panel so that the hook hinges can be inserted into their hinge slots.
See Figure 4-6. Note that the hinge slots are located on the far right edge of the system
unit (using the back of the system unit as the reference).
2. Swing the back edge of the panel toward the system unit’s back edge and press the
outside edges of the side panel tightly against the system unit. This will ensure a tight
seal of the EMI gaskets.
3. Secure the side panel in place by screwing the top and bottom slotted T-15 Torx thumb
screws into their brackets. The recommended torque setting is 6 inch-pounds.
102 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
System Power Supply
This section will prove important to you as you begin to service the system. For example,
you may need to install memory in the system unit. To do this, you need to position the
power supply so you can access the memory slots. To remove the system board, you will
need to remove the power supply. If the power supply fails, you will need to replace it with
a new one. This section will help you accomplish these tasks.
WARNING
To prevent injury, unplug the workstation power cord from the
electrical outlet before servicing any internal components.
The topics covered in this section are:
• Propping up the Power Supply
• Removing the Power Supply
Propping Up the Power Supply
To prop the power supply up, follow these steps:
1. Lay the system on its side on a cushioned surface to protect against damage to the
exterior workstation surfaces as shown in Figure 4-8.
2. Open the left side panel of the system unit by following the procedure in the section
“Opening the Left Side Panel of the System Unit” in this chapter.
3. Unscrew the two screws on the power supply chassis as shown in Figure 4-7.
Figure 4-7. Unscrewing the Power Supply Captive Screws
4. Lift up on the power supply handle. The power supply bail automatically engages once
Power Supply
Power Supply
Handle
Captive Screws
Chapter 4 103
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
the power supply is propped in the upright position as shown in Figure 4-8. Note that
the bail automatically springs into the bail lock to secure the power supply.
Figure 4-8. Propping Up the Power Supply
Closing the System
Once you have completed the task you set out to perform, you are ready to close the
system. To close the system follow these steps:
1. Push slightly back on the power supply until you are able to remove the bail from the
bail lock. Using the power supply handle lower it downward into its original operating
position. See Figure Figure 4-7.
2. Tighten both captive screws in place as seen in Figure 4-7.
3. Replace the left side panel of the system unit as shown in the section “Closing the Left
Side Panel of the System Unit” in this chapter.
Removing the Power Supply
To remove the power supply follow these steps:
1. Follow the steps covered in the section “Propping Up the Power Supply.”
2. Disconnect both power cables from the system board, the control cable, and the power
cable for the SCA disk drives. See Figure 4-9. Note that these cables are keyed to
prevent you from incorrectly plugging them in when you replace the power supply.
Bail
Bail Lock
Bail
Power Supply
104 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-9. Disconnecting the Power Supply Cables
3. Remove the bail from the bail lock. See Figure 4-10.
4. Grasp the power supply by the handle and slide the spring hinge lever to the right and
rotate it downward to lock it in place. See Figure 4-10. This allows you pull outward on
the left side of the power supply while moving the power supply to the left as shown in
Figure 4-10. The power supply should be free from its left spring hinge and right hinge.
You can now remove the power supply from the system unit.
Control Cable
Power
Cable Connector
Connectors
Chapter 4 105
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-10. Removing the Power Supply
Closing the System
Once you have completed the task you set out to perform, you are ready to close the
system. To close the system follow these steps:
1. Pick up the power supply by its handle and slide the power supply pivot hole over the
right side hinge pin.
2. Position the left end of the power supply in its proper location and release the hinge
lever by lifting it up and allow the hinge pin to spring back into place. Adjust the angle
of the power supply until the bail drops into the bail bracket. It will now remain in
place.
3. Replace all power supply and sensor cables as shown in Figure 4-9. Make sure the
cables are positioned so they will not be damaged by power supply movement.
4. Grab the handle of the power supply and lower it into its original operating position.
See Figure 4-7.
5. Tighten both captive screws in place as seen in Figure 4-7.
6. Replace the left side panel to the system unit as shown in the section “Closing the Left
Side Panel of the System Unit” in this chapter.
Power Supply
Right Hinge
BailBail Lock
Spring Lever
Spring Hinge
106 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
I/O Cards
The B1000 and C3000 computer’s PCI assembly has six slots. Slots 5 and 6 are half-size
Peripheral Connect Interface (PCI) slots. Slots 1 through 4 are full-size PCI slots. See
Figure 4-11 for a brief description of slot capabilities.
Figure 4-11. PCI Card Slot Numbering and Capabilities
NOTE
To maintain good graphics performance, you should always use slot 2 (SL2) as
the primary graphics card slot and slot 4 (SL4) as the secondary graphics
card slot.
The six I/O slots as seen from the back of the computer are labeled from top to bottom
starting with one. See Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-12. I/O Slot Numbering
I/O Slot 1
I/O Slot 6
Chapter 4 107
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Removing I/O Cards
This section assumes that you already have I/O cards loaded in the system unit, and you
would like to remove them. You will need a T-15 Torx driver or a flat blade screw driver to
remove the I/O slot bulkhead screws.
Here are the steps required for remove an I/O card from the system unit.
1. Open the side panel of the system unit as explained in the section “Opening the Left
Side Panel of the System Unit” in this chapter.
2. Pull evenly in the direction of the arrow on both sides of the I/O card retainer to remove
it. See Figure 4-13.
Figure 4-13. Removing the I/O Card Retainer
3. Locate the I/O card you want to remove and using a T-15 Torx driver or flat blade screw
driver remove the I/O card’s bulkhead screw as shown in Figure 4-14.
Figure 4-14. Removing the I/O Card
4. Pull evenly on the outside edges of the I/O card to remove it.
I/O Card
Retainer I/O Card
Air Divider
I/O Card Being Removed
108 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Installing I/O Cards
To install a new I/O card, do the following:
NOTE
Slots two and four are the graphics card slots. The primary graphics card slot
is slot number two and the secondary graphics card slot is slot number four.
1. Open the left side panel of the system unit as explained in the section “Opening the Left
Side Panel of the System Unit” in this chapter.
2. Locate the appropriate slot for the I/O card that is to be installed. See Figure 4-12.
3. Unscrew the T-15 Torx screw from the bulkhead blank of the slot you have chosen. If no
blank is present, you may skip to step four.
4. Pull evenly in the direction of the arrow on both sides of the I/O card retainer to remove
it. See Figure 4-13.
5. Insert the I/O card into the slot you have chosen with the bulkhead appropriately
positioned. The ends of the card should be placed in the I/O card guides. Press firmly
and evenly on the I/O card until it is in the connector. Screw the T-15 Torx screw into
the I/O card’s bulkhead to secure the I/O card.
6. Replace the I/O card retainer by placing the bottom retainer clip in the slot on the air
divider and the clips on the PULL tabs snap into their slots on the upper chassis.
7. Close the left side panel of the system unit by following the procedure in the section
“Closing the Left Side Panel of the System Unit” in this chapter.
Chapter 4 109
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
System Unit Fans
The B1000/C3000 has five fans that are used to cool various areas within the unit. If one of
these fans is not working, you will need to replace it to ensure no heat damage is caused to
the system unit. To replace a bad fan, you will need to follow one of three sets of procedures
that are covered in this section. The three procedures are:
• Removing the fan from the hard disk drive area
• Removing the fans from the CPU area
• Removing the fan and speaker from the I/O card area.
Figure 4-15. Fan Cooling Areas for the System Unit
CPU
Hard Disk
Drive Are
a
Area
I/O Card
Area
110 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Removing the Fan from the Hard Disk Drive Area
This section provides the procedure for removing the cooling fan from the back of the hard
disk drive chassis. You will need to remove this fan when it needs replacement and when
you need to access or remove the:
• SCA disk interface board
• System board
• DIMM cards
Here are the steps necessary for removing the fan from the hard disk drive chassis.
1. Remove the system unit’s side panel. See the section “Opening the Left Side Panel of
the System Unit” in this chapter.
2. Lay the system unit on its right side (determined by facing the workstation front panel),
and prop up the power supply. See the section “Propping Up the Power Supply” in this
chapter.
3. Unplug the fan power cable from the system board. If you are removing the hard disk
drive fan to access the memory cards, you do not need to unplug the fan’s power cable.
4. Lift up on the handle of the fan bracket to remove the fan. See Figure 4-16. As you lift
up on the fan bracket, the top alignment tabs will be removed from their hard disk drive
alignment screws, and the bottom alignment tabs will be removed from their holes
allowing the fan to be removed. Once the hard disk drive fan is removed, place it on top
of the hard disk drive chassis.
Chapter 4 111
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-16. Removing the Fan from the Hard Disk Drive Chassis
Removing the Fans from the CPU Area
This section provides the procedure for removing the cooling fans from the CPU area of the
system unit’s chassis. You will need to remove these fans when they need replacement or
repair and when you need to remove the system board.
Here are the steps necessary for removing the fans from the CPU area of the system unit’s
chassis.
1. Remove the system units left side panel. See the section “Opening the Left Side Panel of
the System Unit” in this chapter.
2. Lay the system unit on its right side (determined by facing the system units front
panel), and remove the power supply. See the section “Removing the Power Supply” in
this chapter.
3. Unplug the power cables for the fans as shown in Figure 4-18., and position yourself so
you are facing the back of the system unit. See Figure 4-17.
Fan Bracket Handle
DIMM Card Connector
Bottom Alignment Hole
Fan Bracket
Guide
DIMM Card
Memory Fan Bottom
Alignment Tab
Top
Alignment
Tab
Fan Bracket
112 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-17. Removing the Fan Rivets
4. Remove the plastic mounting rivets that hold the fans in place. See Figure 4-17. To
remove the rivets, press in on the backside of the rivet to release the fastener. If the
rivet backside is inaccessible, use a sharp edged device to remove the rivet from the face
of the rear panel. Also, while removing the rivets, you will need to reach inside the
system unit and hold on to the fan you are removing. If you are removing the top fan,
hold on to the fan and pull outward as shown by the arrow in Figure 4-18. If you are
removing the lower fan, you will need to hold both edges of the fan and slide it to the
right. See arrow one in Figure 4-18. Next pull outward on the fan. See arrow two in
Figure 4-18.
Plastic
Rivet(s)
Plastic
Rivet(s)
Plastic
Rivet(s)
Plastic
Rivet(s)
Chapter 4 113
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-18. Removing CPU Area Fans
Note that you can replace the fans using the original rivets; however, the plastic rivets will
be slightly deformed. If you would like new rivets to replace the old ones, new rivets for
mounting the fans are supplied in the replacement kit.
Installing the Fans for the CPU Area
To replace the system board fans, do the following:
Installing the Bottom Fan
1. Position the bottom fan so its power cable channel is against the system unit chassis,
and the power cable channel as you face the fan is in the lower right corner.
2. Slide the lower left corner of the fan into the fan support. See Figure 4-15.
3. Line up the rivet holes of the fan with the rivet holes of the system unit chassis.
4. Press the plastic rivets into place. See Figure 4-17.
5. Plug the fan power cable into its connector on the system board. See Figure 4-18.
Installing the Top Fan
1. Position the top fan so its power cable channel is up against the workstation chassis,
and the power cable channel as you face the fan is in the upper right corner.
2. Line up the rivet holes of the fan with the rivet holes of the system unit chassis.
3. Press the plastic rivets into place. See Figure 4-17.
4. Plug the fan power cable into its connector on the system board. See Figure 4-18.
(Upper)
System Fan 2
(Lower)
System Fan 3
Top of
Workstation
Front of
Workstati
o
114 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Removing the Fan and Speaker from the I/O Card Area
The I/O area of the system unit has its own cooling fan. Note that there is a speaker
attached to the same mounting bracket as the fan. This section explains how to remove the
fan and speaker if they are defective.
To remove the I/O cooling fan or speaker, do the following:
1. Remove the workstation left side panel. See the section “Opening the Left Side Panel of
the System” in this chapter.
2. Lay the workstation on its side, and remove all of the I/O cards. See the section
“Removing I/O Cards” in this chapter.
3. Remove the system unit air divider as shown in Figure 4-19 by unscrewing the two T-15
Torx screws, which hold it in place. Next grasp the edge of the air divider and pull it
towards you.
Figure 4-19. Removing the System Unit Air Divider
4. Remove the fan and speaker cables from the system board and lift up on the bracket
mounting clip. See arrow in Figure 4-20. Next grab hold of the fan and speaker bracket
and rotate it about 15 degrees to the left. See the arrow in Figure 4-20. The fan and
speaker bracket should now be free of the clip retainer hole and the bracket stop. Now
move the whole mounting bracket to the left or toward the back of the CD Drive chassis.
The fan and speaker mounting bracket is now free of the system unit.
T-15 Screw T-15 Screw
Air Divider
Chapter 4 115
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-20. Removing the Fan and Speaker from the I/O Area
5. To remove the speaker from the mounting bracket, push a finger through the access
hole and spread the two retaining clips. The speaker will pop free of the mounting clips.
Figure 4-21. Removing the Fan and Speaker from the Bracket
Retainer Hole
Bracket Stop
Bracket Mountin
g
Clip
Fan
Speaker
Fan Power
Cable
CD Drive Chassis
Bracket
Speaker Cable
Clips
Mounting Clip
Fan Key
Power Cable
Channel
Mounting
Bracket
Fan
Fan
Mounting
Clip
Bracket Mounting Clip
Speaker
Speaker
Clip
Speaker
Cable
Mounting
116 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
6. Remove the fan from the bracket by slightly pulling the left and right fan mounting
clips away from the fan, and then pulling outward in the direction of the arrow. See
Figure 4-21.
Installing a Fan or Speaker in the I/O Card Area
If you are replacing a fan or speaker in the I/O card area, follow the steps covered in this
section.
1. Remove the fan or speaker from the I/O card area by following the procedure in the
section “Removing the Fan and Speaker from the I/O Card Area” in this chapter.
2. Install the fan by positioning the fan power cable channel so that it is located in the
lower right corner of the fan and speaker mounting bracket. See Figure 4-20. Note that
the power cable channel must be positioned against the mounting bracket. Once you
have the fan in the correct position, pull outward on the fan mounting clips and put the
fan in place. Then release the mounting clips so that they hold the fan on the mounting
bracket.
3. Install the speaker by positioning it so that the speaker cable can be easily run out of
the hole in the back of the mounting bracket. See Figure 4-20. Note that the speaker
cable must be held in place on the backside of the mounting bracket by the speaker
cable clips as shown in Figure 4-20. Once you have the speaker in the correct position,
pull outward on the speaker mounting clips and put the speaker in place. Then release
the mounting clips so that they hold the speaker on the mounting bracket.
4. Replace the fan/speaker bracket in the chassis by inserting the bottom and in first
between the system board and the CD cage. Insert the edge into the slots provided an
then rotate it into place until the mounting clip snaps into place. See Figure 4-20. on
page 115.
5. Position the fan power cable, speaker cable and LCD ribbon cable so that they run along
the system board side of the computer chassis. See Figure 4-20. Dress the cables so that
they are free from damage by other system components.
6. Place the air divider into its proper position as shown in Figure 4-19., and screw the
T-15 Torx screws into place.
7. Replace all I/O cards into their proper slots as explained in the section “I/O Cards” in
this chapter.
8. Close the system unit as discussed in the section “Closing the System Unit” in this
chapter.
Chapter 4 117
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Removable Media Devices
There are only two removable media devices allowed in a B1000/C3000 computer:
• CD Drive
• 3.5-inch floppy disk drive.
The procedures provided in the subsequent sections explain how to install and remove
media devices.
Installing a CD Drive
Install the CD drive by following the procedure covered in this section.
WARNING
Turn the workstation off and unplug the power cord before
installing the CD drive.
Note you will have to verify that the master/slave/CSEL jumper is set in the CSEL
position. Since different manufacturers of CD drives have different locations for the CSEL
jumper, look at the documentation that comes with the CD drive for the proper location of
this jumper.
CAUTION
CD drives are susceptible to mechanical and electronic shock. When handling
the drive, always wear the static-grounding wrist strap that came in the CD
drive kit. Always handle the drive carefully.
1. Perform the procedures in the sections “Opening the System Unit Front Panel” and
“Opening the Left Side Panel of the System Unit.” The front panel must be open to
insert the CD drive into its proper location in the chassis. The left side panel must be
open to access the CD drive ATAPI connector and its power connector.
2. Remove the CD Drive rear cover by unscrewing the T-15 Torx screw as shown in Figure
4-22. Note that the CD drive’s rear cover is located on the rear of the removable media
chassis inside the workstation. Push the cover handle away from the rear of the
removable media chassis approximately one inch. Next pull the cover handle toward
you. The ATAPI data cable, CD audio cable and power cable are now accessible to you.
118 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-22. Removing the CD Drive Rear Cover
3. Rotate the system unit around until you see the front of the unit as shown in Figure
4-23.
Figure 4-23. Front of System Unit with the Front Panel Removed
4. Remove both CD Drive bracket screws (T-15 Torx screws) and pull the CD Drive bracket
out of the chassis assembly as shown in Figure 4-24. Next remove the four CD Drive
blank screws (T-10 Torx screws) as shown in Figure 4-24. and remove the blank from
the bracket. You are now ready to mount the CD Drive into the CD Drive bracket.
Rear Cover
Handle
T-15 Torx/slotted
Screw
Power Cable
ATAPI Cable
Audio
Cable
Rear
Cover
LCD Display
System Power Switch
CD Drive Blank
Floppy Disk Drive Blank
Chapter 4 119
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-24. Removing the CD Drive Bracket and Blank
5. Read the CAUTION statement at the beginning of this section. Next remove the CD
Drive from its shipping container, and using the four T-10 screws mount the disk drive
to the bracket as shown in Figure 4-24.
Bracket
CD Drive Bracket
Blank
Blank Filler Screws
(T-10 Torx Screws)
Bracket Screws
120 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-25. Installing the CD Drive
6. Slide the CD Drive and its bracket into the system unit chassis as shown in Figure 4-25.
There are runners on the side of each bracket and guides inside the CD Drive chassis
that will help the assembly to slide into place.
7. Tighten the two CD Drive bracket screws as shown in Figure 4-26.
Figure 4-26. Tightening the Bracket Screws
8. Plug the ATAPI and power cables into their appropriate connectors. Note that the
connectors are keyed for proper insertion. See Figure 4-27.
CD Drive Bracket Guide
CD Drive
Blank Filler Screws
Bracket Screws
CD Drive Bracket Runner
Bracket
Screw
(hidden)
Bracket Screw
Chapter 4 121
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-27. Plugging in the ATAPI and Power Cables
9. Make sure that the ATAPI and power cables are positioned so that they come out of the
bottom edge of the rear CD Drive cover. This edge is rounded to prevent cutting of the
cables. See Figure 4-28. Next tighten the T-15 Torx screw.
Figure 4-28. Replacing the Rear EMI CD Drive Cover
10. Complete the installation of the CD Drive by replacing the front and side panels of the
system unit. You should also make sure that all cables are positioned with in the system
unit so that they do not hang loosely. This prevents damage to the cables.
Removing a CD Drive
This section explains how to remove a CD Drive from you system unit.
CAUTION
CD Drives are susceptible to mechanical and electronic shock. When handling
the drive, always wear the static-grounding wrist strap that came in the CD
Drive kit. Always handle the drive carefully.
Audio Cable
ATAPI Cable
Power Cable
Rear
Cover
T-15
Torx/Slotted
Screw
122 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
1. Perform the procedures in the sections “Opening the System Unit Front Panel” and
“Opening the Left Side Panel of the System Unit.” The front panel must be open to
remove the CD Drive from the system chassis. The left side panel needs to be opened so
you can get to the CD Drive’s ATAPI connector and its power connector.
2. Remove the CD Drive rear disk cover by unscrewing the T-15 Torx screw as shown in
Figure 4-29. Note that the CD Drive’s rear cover is located on the back of the removable
media chassis inside the system unit. Push the cover handle away from the back of the
removable media chassis approximately one inch. Next pull the cover handle toward
you. The ATAPI and power cables are now accessible to you. Disconnect these cables
from the CD Drive.
Figure 4-29. Removing the CD Drive’s Rear Cover
3. Rotate the system unit around until you see the front of the unit as shown in Figure
4-30.
Figure 4-30. Front of the System Unit with the Front Panel Removed
4. Remove both CD Drive bracket screws (T-15 Torx screws) and pull the CD Drive out of
the chassis assembly as shown in Figure 4-31. Next remove the four CD Drive
Rear Cover
Audio
Cable
ATAPI Cable
Power Cable
Rear Cover
Handle
T-15
Torx/slotted
Screw
LCD
Power Switch
Bracket Screw
Bracket Screw
(hidden)
Chapter 4 123
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
mounting screws (T-10 Torx screws) as shown in Figure 4-31 and remove the CD Drive
from the bracket. You are now ready to attach the CD Drive blank to the CD Drive
bracket.
Figure 4-31. Removing the CD Drive
5. Insert the CD Drive blank in the CD Drive bracket and tighten the four CD Drive
mounting screws to secure the blank. Align the bracket runners and bracket guides and
slide the CD Drive blank and bracket into place. See Figure 4-32.
Bracket Guide
CD Drive
Bracket Runner
CD Drive Mounting
Screws
CD Drive Bracket Bracket Screws
124 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-32. Installing the CD Drive Blank
6. Tighten the two CD Drive bracket screws as shown in Figure 4-33.
Figure 4-33. Tightening the Bracket Screws
7. Place the ATAPI cable and power cables inside the CD Drive chassis, and position the
cables so that they go under the bottom edge of the CD Drive’s rear cover. The rear
Bracket Guide
Blank
Bracket Runner
CD Drive Mounting
Screws
CD Drive Bracket Bracket Screws
Bracket Screw
Bracket Screw
Chapter 4 125
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
cover’s edge is rounded to keep you from cutting the cables. Figure 4-34. Next, place the
end opposite the rear cover handle into the cover slot and tighten the T-15 Torx screw to
secure the rear cover. You have now completed the removal of the CD Drive.
Figure 4-34. Replacing the CD Drive Rear Cover
Installing a Floppy Disk Drive
Install the floppy disk drive by following the procedure covered in this section. Note there
are no jumper settings required for the installation of the floppy disk drive.
WARNING
Turn the workstation off and unplug the power cord before
installing the floppy disk drive.
CAUTION
Floppy disk drives are susceptible to mechanical and electronic shock. When
handling the drive, always wear the static-grounding wrist strap that came in
the Floppy disk drive kit. Always handle the drive carefully.
1. Perform the procedures in the sections “Opening the System Unit Front Panel” and
“Opening the Left Side Panel of the System Unit.” The front panel needs to be opened so
you can insert the floppy disk drive into its proper location in the chassis. The left side
panel needs to be opened to access the floppy’s data connector and its power connector.
2. Remove the floppy rear-disk cover by unscrewing the T-15 Torx screw as shown in
Figure 4-35. Note that the floppy’s rear cover is located on the rear of the removable
media chassis inside the system unit. Push the cover handle away from the rear of the
removable media chassis approximately one inch. Next pull the cover handle toward
you. The data and power cables are now accessible to you.
Rear Cover Handle
Rear Cover
Audio Cable
ATAPI Cable
Power Cable
T-15
Torx/slotted
Screw
126 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-35. Removing the Floppy Disk’s Rear Cover
3. Rotate the system unit around until you see the front of the workstation as shown in
Figure 4-36.
Figure 4-36. Front of Workstation with the Front Panel Removed
4. Remove both floppy disk bracket screws (T-15 Torx screws) and pull the floppy disk
bracket out of the chassis assembly as shown in Figure 4-37. Next remove the four
floppy disk blank screws (T-10 Torx screws) as shown in Figure 4-37. and remove the
blank from the bracket. You are now ready to mount the floppy disk drive into the
floppy disk bracket.
Rear Cover
Rear Cover
Handle
T-15
Torx/slotted
Screw
Power Cable
Floppy Data Cable
LCD
Power Switch
CD Drive
Blank
Floppy Drive
Bank
Chapter 4 127
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-37. Removing the Floppy Disk Bracket and Blank
5. Read the CAUTION statement at the beginning of this section. Next remove the floppy
disk drive from its shipping container, and using the four T-10 blank screws mount the
disk drive to the bracket as shown in Figure 4-38.
Blank
Bracket
Screw
Bracket
Blank Filler Screws
Bracket Screw
128 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-38. Installing the Floppy Disk Drive
6. Slide the floppy disk and its bracket into the system unit chassis as shown in Figure
4-38.
7. Tighten the two floppy bracket screws as shown in Figure 4-39.
Figure 4-39. Tightening the Bracket Screws
8. Plug the data and power cables into their appropriate connectors. Note that the
connectors are keyed for proper insertion. See Figure 4-40.
Floppy Disk
Drive Front
Panel
Bracket Screws
Floppy Disk Drive Bracket
Floppy Disk Drive Mounting
Screws (T-10 Torx Screws)
Bracket Screw
(hidden)
Bracket Screw
Chapter 4 129
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-40. Plugging in the Data and Power Cables
9. Verify that the data and power cables are positioned to come out of the top edge of the
rear floppy cover. This edge is rounded to prevent cutting of the cables. See Figure 4-41.
Next tighten the T-15 rear cover screw.
Figure 4-41. Replacing the Rear Floppy Cover
10.Complete the installation of the floppy disk drive by replacing the front and side panels
of the system unit. You should also make sure that all cables are positioned within the
system unit so that they do not hang loosely. This will prevent damage to the cables.
Removing a Floppy Disk Drive
1. Perform the procedures in the sections “Opening the System Unit Front Panel” and
“Opening the Left Side Panel of the System Unit.” The front panel needs to be opened so
you can remove the floppy disk drive from the system unit chassis. The left side panel
needs to be opened so you can get to the floppy’s data connector and its power connector.
Data Cable
Power
Cable
T-15
Torx/slotted
Screw
Floppy Rear Cover
Power Cable
Data Cable
130 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
2. Remove the floppy rear disk cover by unscrewing the T-15 Torx screw as shown in
Figure 4-42. Note that the floppy’s rear cover is located on the rear of the removable
media chassis inside the system unit. Push the cover handle away from the rear of the
removable media chassis approximately one inch. Next pull the cover handle toward
you. Remove the data and power cables from their connectors.
Figure 4-42. Removing the Floppy Disk’s Rear Cover
3. Rotate the workstation around until you can see the front of the unit as shown in
Figure 4-43..
Figure 4-43. Front of Workstation with the Front Panel Removed
4. Remove both floppy disk bracket screws (T-15 torx screws) and pull the floppy disk drive
out of the chassis assembly as shown in Figure 4-43. Next remove the four floppy disk
mounting screws (T-10 torx screws) as shown in Figure 4-44 and remove the floppy disk
drive from the bracket. You are now ready to attach the floppy disk drive blank to the
floppy disk bracket.
T-15
Torx/slotted
Screw
Floppy Rear CoverData Cable
Power Cable
Bracket
Screw
(hidden)
LCD
Power Switch
Floppy Disk Drive
Bracket Screw
Chapter 4 131
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-44. Removing the Floppy Disk Drive
5. Place the floppy disk blank in the floppy disk bracket and insert the four floppy disk
mounting screws into the bracket and tighten them. See Figure 4-45.
Floppy Disk
Mounting Screw
(four, T-10)
Floppy Disk Drive
Floppy Disk Bracket
Bracket
Screw
132 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-45. Installing the Floppy Disk Blank and Bracket
6. Slide the floppy disk blank and its bracket into the system unit chassis as shown in
Figure 4-45.
7. Tighten the two floppy disk bracket screws as shown in Figure 4-46..
Figure 4-46. Tightening the Bracket Screws
Floppy Disk
Bracket
Bracket Screw
Floppy Disk
Mounting Screws
(four, T-10)
Floppy Disk Blank
Bracket Screw
Bracket Screw
Chapter 4 133
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
8. Inspect and verify that the data and power cables are positioned to come out of the top
edge of the rear floppy cover. This edge is rounded to prevent cutting of the cables. See
Figure 4-47. Put the rear cover in place and tighten the T-15 rear cover screw.
Figure 4-47. Replacing the Rear Floppy Cover
9. Complete the installation of the floppy disk drive by replacing the front and side panels
of the system unit. Verify that all cables are positioned properly within the workstation
to avoid damage to the cables.
Rear Cover
T-15
Torx/slotted
Screw
Rear Cover HandleData Cable
Power
Cable
134 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Hard Disk Drive
This section describes installation and removal of hard disk drives in the B1000/C3000
workstation.The first subsection details how to install a hard drive, the second subsection
details how to remove a hard disk drive and the final subsection describes how to configure
the hard disk after it is installed.
The B1000/C3000 workstations may have a maximum of two hard drives. The hard drive
that came with the workstation was set to SCSI ID 6. If adding a second hard disk drive,
the second hard disk drive will use SCSI ID 5. Note that the two slots for the hard disk
drives have SCSI ID numbers 5 and 6 preassigned to them. You will not be able to change
the SCSI ID numbers.
NOTE
Do not use SCSI ID 7 for any of the internal or external disk drives. The host
SCSI controller uses SCSI ID 7.
Installing a Hard Disk Drive
NOTE
If you are installing a new hard disk drive, the slotted pan screws for
attaching the drive in the carrier are stored on the carrier rails. Also, see the
section titled “Hard Disk Drive Configuration” in Chapter 2 in this manual.
1. Open the front panel of the workstation, refer to the section “Opening the System Unit
Front Panel.” In the front lower-right corner of the workstation, there are two hard
drive slots. The slot on the far right is the one discussed in this section. See Figure 4-48.
Chapter 4 135
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-48. The Hard Drive Slots
2. Open the hard drive slot by pressing the plastic release hook upward and pulling
outward on the release lever as shown in Figure 4-49. As you pull outward on the
release lever the hard drive bracket will easily slide out of the slot.
Hard Disk Drive
Slots
SCSI ID 5
SCSI ID 6
(Boot Disk)
136 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-49. Removing the Hard Drive Bracket
3. Mount the hard disk drive on the hard drive bracket using the four T-10 torx screws and
rubber mounting grommets as shown in Figure 4-50. Next, slide the assembly into its
hard drive slot, and push inward on the release lever until the front of the hard dive
bracket is flush with the system unit. To verify a good connection with the SCA hard
disk interface (backplane board) connector, press firmly around the corners of the hard
drive bracket.
NOTE
If you are installing a hard disk drive, you will need to mount it and create a
file system on it. This should be done after you have installed the hard disk
drive.
To mount a hard disk drive and create a file system on it use the procedure in
the section “Adding a Hard Disk Drive as a File System Using SAM” found in
this chapter.
Hard Disk Drive Bracket
Two T-15 Torx Hard Disk
Drive Mounting Screws
(hidden)
Plastic Release Hook
Release Lever
Two T-15 Torx Hard Disk Drive Mounting Screws
Chapter 4 137
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-50. Inserting the Hard Disk Drive
Removing a Hard Disk Drive
This procedure explains how to remove the hard disk drive. Note that there are no cables
for you to worry about when removing a hard disk drive.
1. Open the front panel of the system using the instructions found in the section “Opening
the System Front Panel.” In the lower-right corner of the system unit as you face it,
there are two hard drive slots. The slot on the far right is the one discussed in this
section. See Figure 4-51.
T-15 Torx
Hard Drive Bracket
Hard Disk
Drive
Plastic Release
Hook
Release Lever
Shoulder Screw
Mounting Grommet
(do not remove)
138 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-51. The Hard Drive Slots
2. Open the hard drive slot by pressing the plastic release hook upward and pulling
outward on the release lever as shown in Figure 4-52.. As you pull outward on the
release lever, the hard drive bracket will slide out of its slot.
Figure 4-52. Removing the Hard Disk Drive
SCSI ID 5
SCSI ID 6
Hard Disk Drive
Slots
Hard Disk Drive
Bracket
Plastic
Release Hook
Release Lever
Hard Disk Drive
Chapter 4 139
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
3. Remove the four T-15 Torx screws from the hard disk drive bracket. See Figure 4-53..
Figure 4-53. Removing the Hard Disk Drive from the Bracket
4. Slide the assembly into its hard drive slot, and push inward on the release lever until
the front of the hard dive bracket is flush with the system unit. See Figure 4-54.
Mounting Grommet
(do not remove)
T-15 Torx Shoulder
Screw
Hard Disk Drive
Bracket
Plastic Release Hook
Plastic Release
Hard Disk
Drive
Lever
140 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-54. Replacing the Hard Disk Drive Bracket
Hard Disk Drive
Bracket
Plastic Release Hook
Release Lever
Storage Location for the
Four T-15 Shoulder Screws
Chapter 4 141
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
DIMM Cards
This section contains information regarding the installation and removal of memory
(DIMM cards). Before continuing with this section, carefully read the following list of
considerations:
• Use the procedure described in “Displaying the Current Memory Configuration” on
page 175 before attempting to install additional memory DIMMs in the workstation.
• Review the steps involved in installing memory DIMMs before you begin.
• Insert DIMMs in the order shown. Please refer to Figure 4-56.
• Note the proper orientation for DIMMs when inserting them into their connectors
because the connectors are keyed to prevent backwards installation. See Figure 4-57.
• Use the “Boot Console Handler” to verify that the computer recognizes the additional
DIMMs when you have finished installation.
Installing Additional Memory
Perform the following steps to add memory (DIMM cards) to the workstation.
1. Open the side panel of the system unit as explained in the section “Opening the Left
Side Panel of the System Unit” of this chapter.
2. Lay the system on its side as shown in Figure 4-55. The memory slots should be aligned
as shown in Figure 4-57. Figure 4-56. provides the loading sequence for the DIMM
cards. Currently the B1000 and C3000 workstations use 128 Mbyte and 256 Mbyte
DIMM cards. Note that the DIMM cards do not have to be loaded in pairs.
Figure 4-55. Propping Up the Power Supply
3. Prop up the system unit power supply as explained in the section “Propping Up the
System Unit Power Supply” in this chapter.
Power Supply
Disk/Memory Fan
DIMM Card
DIMM Connector
142 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
4. For ease in installation of additional memory the hard disk drive fan may need to be
removed. See the section “Removing the Fan from the Hard Disk Drive Area” on page
110 in this chapter.
5. Load the DIMM cards in the slots using the loading sequence provided in Figure 4-56.
Figure 4-56. DIMM Card Slot Numbers and Loading Sequence
NOTE
When installing DIMMs, you need to orient the notches on the bottom edge of
the DIMM card so that they are aligned with the keys on the DIMM
connector. See Figure 4-57. The keyed DIMM connectors prevent you from
installing the DIMM cards backwards.
6. Press downward on the ejector tabs located on both sides of the DIMM connector. See
Figure 4-57. This opens the connector for DIMM card insertion.
Disk/Memory
Fan
Chapter 4 143
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-57. Installing Memory Cards
7. Place the DIMM card in the connector, lining it up with the guides. Make sure to put
the notched end toward the white ejector tab (to the left). See Figure 4-57.
8. Close the ejector tab.
9. Press firmly and evenly on the DIMM card to ensure that it seats properly. The ejector
tabs engage when the DIMM is properly seated.
10.Replace the power supply and workstation left side panel. You may now plug the power
cord back in to the electrical outlet.
11.Verify that this installation was successful by following the steps in Chapter 6, “The
Boot Console Handler.” If you have only replaced a faulty DIMM, you must execute the
pdt clear command in the service menu of the Boot Console Handler. Answer yes (Y)
to the prompt “Continue? (Y/N) >.”
Once you have completed the steps listed above, the DIMM cards are properly loaded.
Removing Memory
Perform the following steps to remove memory (DIMM cards) from the system unit.
1. Open the side panel of the system unit as explained in the section “Opening the Left
Side Panel of the System Unit” in this chapter.
2. Lay the system on its side as shown in Figure 4-58.
Press down on ejector tabs to open
them and place the DIMM card in
the connector so that your fingers
are on the edge of the DIMM card.
Push the DIMM card down firmly
and evenly into the connector to
be sure it is properly seated.
White Ejector Tab
Black
Ejector Tab
Notches
Step 1
Step 2
144 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-58. Propping Up the Power Supply
3. Prop up the system unit power supply as explained in the section “Propping Up the
System Unit Power Supply” in this chapter.
4. For ease in removing memory cards, remove the fan from the hard disk drive chassis.
See the section “Removing the Fan from the Hard Disk Drive Chassis” in this chapter.
5. Press downward on the ejector tabs located on both sides of the DIMM connector. See
Figure 4-59. This raises the DIMM card for easy extraction.
Figure 4-59. Removing Memory Cards
6. Lift up evenly on the outside edges of the DIMM card. See Figure 4-59..
7. Replace the power supply and system unit side panel. You may now plug the power cord
back into the electrical outlet.
8. Verify that the removal was successful by following the steps in Chapter 6, “Boot
Console Handler.”
Power
Supply
Fan
Bracket
DIMM Connectors
Disk/Memory
Fan
Ejector Tabs
Notches
Chapter 4 145
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
System Unit LCD
This section describes how to remove and replace the B1000/C3000 workstation power
switch/LCD assembly, which is located on the front panel.
Removing the System Unit LCD
To remove the LCD assembly, perform the following steps:
1. Open the system unit’s front panel as shown in the section “Opening the System Unit
Front Panel.”
2. Unplug the LCD’s connector as shown in Figure 4-60.
Figure 4-60. Removing the System Unit LCD
3. Press inward on the mount clip located on the right side of the LCD mount and pull the
right side of the LCD outward in a clockwise motion. See Figure 4-60.. This action
releases the LCD’s left side mounting clips.
Replacing the Power Switch/LCD Assembly
To replace the power switch/LCD assembly, do the following:
1. Open the system unit’s front panel as shown in the section “Opening the System Unit
Front Panel.”
2. Insert the LCD’s left-side mounting clips into the slots shown on the system unit
chassis. See Figure 4-60. Press inward on the mount clip located on the right side of the
LCD mount bracket and insert this clip into the hole provided for it on the system unit
chassis.
3. Plug in the LCD connector as shown in Figure 4-60.
LCD Connector
LCD
Mount Clip
Mounting Clips
146 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
4. Replace the system unit’s front panel. This completes the installation of the system
LCD assembly.
Chapter 4 147
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
The System Board
The system board contains the I/O section, computer main memory, CPU, and all of the
circuitry and connections that control how the workstation’s hardware and operating
system interact with each other. If any of the components on the system board are
defective, you must remove the system board from the workstation chassis.
The system board in the B1000/C3000 workstation is mounted on a tray. The following
procedures describe how to remove and replace the system board tray assembly as a
complete unit.
Removing the System Board
To remove the system board tray assembly, do the following:
1. Remove the left side panel as explained in the section “Opening the Left Side Panel of
the System Unit” in this chapter.
NOTE
Remove the terminators on the rear panel of the workstation.
2. Remove the two T-15 Torx screws that secure the system board tray assembly to the
rear panel of the workstation.
3. Remove the system unit power supply as covered in the section “System Unit Power
Supply” in this chapter.
4. Remove the hard disk drive fan as described in the section “Removing the Fan from the
Hard Disk Drive Area”.
5. Remove the DIMM cards as explained in the section “Removing Memory” in this
chapter.
6. Remove the PCI retainer, the I/O cards from their PCI slots and the air divider as
covered earlier in this chapter.
7. Unplug the following cables from the system board:
a. Floppy disk drive data cable
b. CD drive data cable
c. Hard disk drive fan cable
d. Fan/Speaker cables
e. LCD ribbon cable
f. CD drive audio cable
g. System board fan cables (2)
h. Ultra2 Wide LVD SCSI cable
148 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-61. Removing the System Board
8. Fold back the workstation cables to avoid interference or damage.
9. Grasp the system board tray handle and slide the system board to the front of the
workstation. The system board tray keyholes are unlatched from the chassis wall hooks.
Lift the system board up then rotate to clear the top chassis hem and remove.
Installing the System Board Tray Assembly
To install the system board perform the following steps:
1. Angle the system board assembly diagonally as you begin installation. Position the
system board flat inside the chassis. Slide the system board tray slightly to the front
and then to the rear of the workstation to engage the chassis wall hooks. See Figure
4-62.
System Board
Right
Left
Edge
Edge
Chapter 4 149
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Figure 4-62. Installing the System Board
2. Re-attach the cables described in step 7 of “Removing the System Board” on page 147
and replace the two T-15 Torx screws on the rear of the chassis.
3. Replace the following components:
a. Power supply
b. DIMM cards
c. Hard disk drive fan
d. PCI air divider
e. PCI cards
f. PCI retainer
4. Replace the left side panel as explained in the section “Opening the Left Side Panel of
the System Unit” in this chapter.
Fan
Power
Fan
Power
LCD Display
Connector
Connector
Fan Power
Connector
Speaker
CD Drive
Connector
Floppy
Drive
Connector
Ultra2 Wide LVD SCSI Connector
Connector
CD Power
Connector
Connector
150 Chapter4
Field Replaceable Units
FRU Removal and Replacement
Replacing the Battery
The battery in the B1000/C3000 workstation is contained within the real time clock
module, part number 1826-4269, on the system board. The component reference
designation is U33 on the system board. Follow the steps below to replace the battery:
1. Close all open applications on the workstation then use the power button on the front
panel to shut down.
2. Unplug the power cord from the workstation to disconnect all AC power. Remove the
workstation left side panel and place the workstation flat on a cushioned stable surface.
Adhere to electrostatically safe best practices before handling any internal components.
3. Remove the two captive screws for the power supply shown in Figure 4-7. on page 102.
Pull up on the power supply handle to engage the bail support for positioning the power
supply at approximately 90˚ to the system board.
Unplug the 6-pin power supply cable from the system board and move aside for
accessing the dual-in-line pin socket connector.
4. Carefully remove the defective real time clock module. Note the polarity dot which is
silk-screened on the component side of the circuit board.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used
batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions
CAUTION
Il y a danger d´explosion s´il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement acvec une batterie du même type ou d´un type
recommandé par le constructeur. Mettre au rébut les batteries usagées
conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
5. Insert the replacement part for U33 with the correct polarity to ensure proper
functionality. See Table 4-2. on page 95 for the correct part number.
6. Reconnect the 6-pin power supply cable to the system board. Push back slightly on the
power supply to disengage the support bail from the bail lock. Lower the power supply
to original operating position. See Figure 4-8. on page 103.
7. Replace the left side panel of the system unit as shown in the section “Closing the left
Side Panel of the System Unit” in this chapter.
Carefully inspect the seating of the left side panel in the mainframe chassis to assure
that the safety interlock switch is activated.
Apply AC power to the workstation and cycle the power button to the on position.
8. The B1000/C3000 workstation is now ready to reboot with the operational battery.
151
5Diagrams
This chapter provides functional information about the B1000/C3000 workstations. The
following block diagrams are intended as a guide to understanding the overall power
distribution and the functional overview of the workstations.
152 Chapter5
Diagrams
System Power
System Power
Figure 5–1 shows the system power distribution.
Figure 5-1. Power Distribution Diagram
Chapter 5 153
Diagrams
Figure 5–2 shows the system unit block diagram.
Figure 5-2. System Unit Functional Block Diagram
154 Chapter5
Diagrams
155
6Boot Console Handler
This chapter explains how to use the Boot Console Handler, which provides an interactive
environment after the power-on sequence in HP Visualize B1000/C3000 workstations.
156 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
Here are the topics covered in this chapter:
• Boot Console Handler Features
• Accessing the Boot Console Handler
• Booting the Workstation
• Searching for Bootable Media
• Resetting the Workstation
• Displaying and Setting Paths
• Displaying and Setting the Monitor type
• Changing the Console to an External Terminal
• Displaying the Current Memory Configuration
• Display the Status of the System I/O
• Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search
• Displaying and Setting the Security Mode
• Displaying and setting the Fastboot
• Displaying the LAN station address
• Displaying System Information
• Displaying PIM information
Chapter 6 157
Boot Console Handler
Boot Console Handler Features
Boot Console Handler Features
There are times when you want to interact directly with the hardware of your computer
before it boots the operating system. The workstation provides a menu-driven boot console
handler that allows you to perform special tasks, display information, and set certain
system parameters, even if the operating system is unavailable.
Here are some of the things you can do:
• Boot your computer
• Search for bootable media
• Reset your computer
• Display and set boot paths
• Display and set your monitor type
• Display memory configuration information
• Display the status of the PCI slots
• Set Auto Boot, Auto Search, and Auto Start
• Set Fastboot
• Display LAN information
• Display system information
The boot console menus follow, showing the various tasks you can perform and the
available information.
The shortened version of all commands is indicated by the uppercase letters.
Help is available for all the menus and commands by using either help,he or ?and the
menu or command for which you want help.
158 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
Accessing the Boot Console Handler
Accessing the Boot Console Handler
If the workstation has crashed or power was turned off for some reason, press the power
switch and proceed to step 3. Otherwise, to access the boot console handler, follow these
steps:
1. Close any files and applications on your computer.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the workstation.
NOTE
There is no need to manually shut down the HP-UX operating system on your
computer before powering it off. When you turn off the power switch, your
computer automatically shuts down the operating system before terminating
the power.
Make sure you do not unplug the system’s power cord or otherwise interrupt power to
the system unit at this time.
3. Power on the workstation after it has completely shut down. If Autoboot is turned off,
the boot sequence automatically stops at the boot console Main Menu.
If auto boot is turned on, you will see the following message:
Processor is starting Autoboot process. To
discontinue, press any key within 10 seconds.
If auto boot and auto search are both turned on, you will see the following message:
Processor is booting from first available device. To discontinue,
press any key within 10 seconds.
NOTE
If you are using a power-saving monitor, you will have less than 10 seconds
from the time this message appears to press a key.
4. Press a key. You will then see the message:
Boot terminated
The Main Menu of the boot console appears.
Chapter 6 159
Boot Console Handler
Boot Console Menus
Boot Console Menus
The boot console menus follow, showing the various tasks you can perform and the
available information.
The shortened version of all commands is indicated by the uppercase letters.
Help is available for all the menus and commands by typing either help,he or ?and the
menu or command for which you want help.
160 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
Boot Console Menus
Here are the menus:
---------------- Main Menu ------------------------------------------------
Command Description
----------- ----------------------------------
BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path
PAth [PRI|ALT|CON|KEY|[<path>] Display or modify a path
SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>] Search for boot devices
COnfiguration [<command>] Access Configuration menu/commands
INformation [<command>] Access Information menu/commands
Service [<command>] Access Service menu/commands
DIsplay Redisplay the current menu
HElp [<menu>|<commands>] Display help for menu or command
RESET Restart the system
-------------
Main Menu: Enter command >
Chapter 6 161
Boot Console Handler
Boot Console Menus
------ Configuration Menu -----------------------------
Command Description
------- -----------
AUto [BOot|SEArch][ON|OFF] Display or set specified auto flag
BootID [<proc>] [<boot ID>] Display or modify processor boot ID
BootINfo Display boot-related information
BootTimer [0 - 200] Seconds allowed for boot attempt
CPUconfig [<proc>] [ON|OFF] Config/deconfig processor
DEfault Set the system to predefined values
FastBoot [ON|OFF] Display or set boot tests execution
LanConfig [<params>] Display or set LAN Configuration
MOnitor [LIST|<path> <type>] Change the current monitor type
PAth [PRI|ALT|CON|KEY] [<path>] Display or modify a path
SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>] Search for boot devices
SECure [ON|OFF] Set/show security mode
TIme [c:y:m:d:h:m:[s]] Read or set real time clock in GMT
PreviousPower PreviousPower [ON|OFF] Set previous power state
BOot [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command
DIsplay Redisplay the current menu
HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command
RESET Restart the system
MAin Return to Main Menu
-----
Configuration Menu: Enter command >
162 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
Boot Console Menus
------------- Information Menu --------------------------------------
Command Description
------- -----------------------------
ALL Display all system information
BootINfo Display boot-related information
CAche Display cache information
ChipRevisions Display revisions of VLSI and firmware
COprocessor Display coprocessor information
FwrVersion Display firmware version
IO Display I/O interface information
LanAddress Display built-in system LAN address
MEmory Display memory information
PRocessor Display processor information
WArnings Display selftest warning messages
BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path
DIsplay Redisplay the current menu
HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command
RESET Restart the system
MAin Return to Main Menu
------
Information Menu: Enter command >
Chapter 6 163
Boot Console Handler
Boot Console Menus
------ Service Menu -----------------------------------
Command Description
------- ------------------------------------
ChassisCodes [<proc>] Display/enable/disable chassis codes
CLEARPIM Clear (zero) the contents of PIM
EepromRead [<addr>] {<len>} Read EEPROM locations
MemRead <addr> [<len>] [a] Read memory locations
PCIDelay [<value>] Display or set PCI delay value
PDT [CLEAR] Display or clear the Page Deallocation Table
PIM [<proc> [HPMC|LPMC|TOC]] Display PIM information
ScRoll [ON|OFF] Display or change scrolling ability
BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path
DIsplay Redisplay the current menu
HElp Display help for menu or command
RESET Restart the system
MAin Return to Main Menu
-----
Service Menu: Enter command >
164 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
Booting The Workstation
Booting The Workstation
In general the B1000/C3000 workstation is started by the power switch and HP-UX boots
automatically. However, you may not always want the usual sequence to occur.
For example, you may want to start the workstation from an operating system that is
stored on a device that is different from the usual boot device. If the normal operating
system kernel or the disk on which it resides becomes damaged or unusable, you may wish
to boot from a different disk or perhaps another type of device, such as a CD drive.
Here are some possible booting scenarios you may encounter:
• If you know which device you want to boot from, and you know that it contains a
bootable operating system, follow the directions in “Accessing the Boot Console
Handler” earlier in this chapter, and then type the following at the prompt and press
Enter:
Main Menu: Enter command > boot device
where device is the hardware path to the device, specified in Mnemonic Style Notation.
For example, if you wish to boot an operating system that is stored on a DDS-format
tape drive that is located at the hardware path scsi.1.0, you would type the following
command at the prompt and press Enter:
Main Menu: Enter command > boot scsi.1.0
• If you do not know which device you want to boot from, then type the following at the
prompt and press Enter:
Main Menu: Enter command > search
A message similar to the following will be displayed:
Path Number Device Path Device Type
----------- ---------------- ------------------
P0 IDE TEAC CD-532E-B
P1 FWSCSI.6.0 SEAGATE ST39102LC
At the prompt, you might type the following and press Enter:
Main Menu: Enter command > boot P1
Note that the operating system on the specified device (P1) is used to boot the
workstation (also, see the section “Searching for Bootable Media”).
• If you wish to interact with the Initial System Loader (ISL) before booting the
workstation, follow the directions in “Accessing the Boot Console Handler” earlier in
this chapter, and then type the following at the prompt and press Enter:
Main Menu: Enter command > boot device
The following prompt will appear:
Interact with ISL (Y, N, Q) >
Chapter 6 165
Boot Console Handler
Booting The Workstation
Answering yes (Y) causes the ISL to be loaded from the specified device. After a short
time, the following prompt appears on your screen:
ISL>
ISL is the program that actually controls the loading of the operating system. By
interacting with ISL, you can choose to load an alternate version of the HP-UX
operating system. If you do not want to interact with ISL, you must enter no (N).
For example, if the usual kernel (/stand/vmunix) on your root disk (fwscsi.6.0) has
become corrupted, and you wish to boot your computer from the backup kernel
(/stand/vmunix.prev), type the following at the ISL> prompt and press Enter:
ISL> hpux /stand/vmunix.prev
• If you do not know which media in your file systems have bootable operating systems,
you can find them with the search ipl command. See the subsequent section
“Searching for Bootable Media” on page 166.
166 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
Searching for Bootable Media
Searching for Bootable Media
To list devices that contain bootable media, follow the directions in “Accessing the Boot
Console Handler” earlier in this chapter, and then type the following at the prompt and
press Enter:
Main Menu: Enter command > search ipl
The search command searches all buses. The search may turn up more devices than there
are lines on your display. If you are using a text terminal, you may control the progress of
the search from your terminal’s keyboard by performing the following steps:
• To hold the display temporarily, press Ctrl S
• To continue the display, press Ctrl Q
• To halt the search, press any other key
These flow-control commands do not work with a bit-mapped display, but such a display
can show more than forty lines of text, so you are unlikely to need them.
To search for devices of just one type that actually contain bootable media, follow the
directions in “Accessing the Boot Console Handler” earlier in this chapter, and then type
the following at the prompt and press Enter:
Main Menu: Enter command> search ipl device_type
Where
device_type
is one of the following:
•fwscsi is the built-in Ultra2 Wide LVD SCSI bus.
•scsi is the built-in Fast Narrow Single-Ended SCSI bus.
•lan is all connections to the built-in LAN.
•ide is the built-in CD-ROM.
•pcin is an optional SCSI interface in slot number n.
For more information about the SEARCH command, type the following at the prompt and
press Enter:
Main Menu: Enter command> help search
Chapter 6 167
Boot Console Handler
Resetting the Workstation
Resetting the Workstation
To reset your workstation to its predefined values, follow the directions in “Accessing the
Boot Console Handler” earlier in this chapter, and then type the following at the prompt
and press Enter:
Main Menu: Enter command > co
When the Configuration Menu appears, type the following at the prompt and press Enter:
Configuration Menu: Enter command > default
When the Configuration Menu appears, type the following at the prompt and press Enter:
Config Menu: Enter command > reset
168 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
Displaying and Setting Paths
Displaying and Setting Paths
A path is the hardware address of a device that is attached to the I/O system of your
workstation. The path command sets the system paths shown in Table 6-1.
The path command sets and displays the hardware address of a specified device attached
to the I/O bus of your workstation.
To display the current settings for the system paths, type the following at the prompt and
press Enter:
Main Menu: Enter command > path
The paths are displayed in Mnemonic Style Notation, as shown in Table 6-2.
To display the current setting for a particular system path, follow the directions in
“Accessing the Boot Console Handler” earlier in this chapter, and then type the following
at the prompt and press Enter:
Main Menu: enter command > path path_type
where path_type is one of the path types listed in Table 6-1.
For example, to get the path to the primary boot device, follow the directions in “Accessing
Boot Console Handler” earlier in this chapter, and then type the following at the prompt
and press Enter:
Main Menu: Enter command > path primary
To set a system path to a new value, follow the directions in “Accessing the Boot Console
Table 6-1. System Paths
Path Type Device
primary or pri Your workstation’s default boot device (usually the root disk)
alternate or alt Your workstation’s alternate boot device (usually a DDS-format tape
device)
console or con Your workstation’s primary display device
keyboard or key Your workstation’s primary ASCII input device
Table 6-2. Mnemonic Style Notation
I/O Specification Format
Built-in LVD SCSI fwscsi.
scsi_address
.
logical_unit_number
Built-in NSE SCSI scsi.
scsi_address.logical_unit_number
Optional SCSI pci
n
.
scsi_address.logical_unit_number
Built-in LAN lan.
server_address
.
init_timeout
.
io_timeout
Built-in IDE IDE
Chapter 6 169
Boot Console Handler
Displaying and Setting Paths
Handler” earlier in this chapter, and then type the following at the prompt and press Enter:
Main Menu: Enter command > path
path_type
path
where path_type is one of the path types listed in Table 6-1. and path is the specification of
the path in Mnemonic Style Notation (as described in Table 6-2.). For example, to set the
primary boot path to a SCSI disk with an ID of 6.0, follow the directions in “Accessing the
Boot Console Handler” earlier in this chapter, and then type the following at the prompt:
Main Menu: Enter command > path pri fwscsi.6.0
170 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
Displaying and Setting the Monitor Type
Displaying and Setting the Monitor Type
The workstation ships from the factory preset to use a monitor with a specific resolution
and frequency. If you replace your workstation’s monitor with a different type of monitor,
you must reconfigure your workstation to support the new monitor.
The Monitor Command
The monitor command lets you change your workstation’s graphics configuration. This
command is available in the Configuration Menu of the Boot Console Handler.
NOTE
The monitor command lets you change your workstation’s graphics
configuration before you replace your monitor. For information about
changing the configuration after you replace your monitor, go to the section
“Changing Your Monitor Type” in the “Setting the Monitor Type at Power On”
on page 173.
To display the current graphics and console information, enter the following command:
Main Menu: Enter command> configuration
Configuration Menu: Enter command> monitor
The correct usage for setting the graphics configurations is:
monitor
graphics_path type
where valid graphics_path parameters are:
graphics(1) - Graphics adapter installed in option slot 1.
graphics(2) - Graphics adapter installed in option slot 2 (primary slot).
graphics(3) - Graphics adapter installed in option slot 3.
graphics(4) - Graphics adapter installed in option slot 4 (secondary slot).
graphics(5) - Graphics adapter installed in option slot 5.
graphics(6) - Graphics adapter installed in option slot 6.
and type is the numerical monitor type as shown with the monitor list command. See
“Setting the Monitor Type” on page 172 for a list of types. For example, an HP
VISUALIZE-EG graphics card (A4977A) installed in option slot 2 would be graphics(2).
Note that you can have graphics(1) through graphics(6) for your graphics_path;
however, there are two preferred I/O slots available for graphics cards in the workstation.
Those slots are slots 2 and 4. Slot 2 is the primary graphics card slot, and slot 4 is the
secondary graphics card slot.
NOTE
No space/blank characters may be used in the graphics_path names.
Chapter 6 171
Boot Console Handler
Displaying and Setting the Monitor Type
Displaying the Current Monitor Configuration
To display the current monitor configuration for your system from the Configuration Menu
of the Boot Console Handler, follow the directions in “Accessing the Boot Console Handler”
on page 158 in this chapter. Once you are in the Boot Console Handler Main Menu, type
the following command and press Enter:
Main Menu: Enter command> configuration
This places you in the Configuration Menu. From here, type the following command at the
prompt and press Enter:
Config Menu: Enter command> monitor
The screen displays a list of the current graphics adapters and their monitor types
configured for the workstation.
MONITOR INFORMATION
Path Slot Head HPA Resolution Freq Type Class
------- ----- ---- ------ ---------- ----- ---- -------
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1 fffa000000 1280x1024 75Hz 1 PCI
Configuration Menu: Enter command>
In this example, only the graphics adapter, GRAPHICS(2), is configured. The monitor type
for GRAPHICS(2) is set to type 1, which for this card is a 1280x1024 monitor that uses a
frequency of 75 Hz.
172 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
Displaying and Setting the Monitor Type
Setting the Monitor Type
You can set the monitor type for a graphics adapter by typing the following at the prompt
and pressing Enter:
Configuration Menu: Enter command> monitor graphics(
n
)
tt
Where nis the number of the graphics adapter and tt is the monitor type. To display a list
of supported monitors that are used by the graphics card, type the following command at
the prompt and press Enter:
Configuration Menu: Enter command> monitor list
A list of valid monitor types similar to the following is displayed:
MONITOR INFORMATION
Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class
---- ---- ---- ---- --------- ---- -----
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1 1 1280x1024 75Hz PCI
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1 2 1280x1024 75Hz PCI, Double buffered
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1 3 1280x1024 75Hz PCI, Greyscale
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1 4 1280x1024 75Hz PCI, Double buffered, Greyscale
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1 5 1280x768 75Hz PCI
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1 6 800x600 75Hz PCI
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1 7 640x480 75Hz PCI
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1 8 1600x1200 75Hz PCI
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1 9 1600x1200 75Hz PCI, Greyscale
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1 10 1200x1600 75Hz PCI
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1 11 1200x1600 75Hz PCI, Greyscale
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1 12 1280x1024 72Hz
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1 13 1280x1024 72Hz Double buffered
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1 14 640x480 60Hz
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1 15 ---------- user defined -----------
Configuration Menu: Enter command>
To set the monitor type for GRAPHICS(2) to monitor type 1 type the following at the
command prompt and press Enter:
Config Menu: Enter command> monitor graphics(2) 1
This will take effect on the next reboot.
MONITOR INFORMATION
Path Slot Head HPA Resolution Freq Type Class
----- ----- ----- ------ ----------- ------ --- -------
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1 fffa000000 1280x1024 75Hz 1 PCI
Configuration Menu: Enter command>
Chapter 6 173
Boot Console Handler
Displaying and Setting the Monitor Type
The boot console may display a message that tells you that your new monitor selection will
take effect the next time you reboot your workstation. The boot console also displays the
new monitor information.
Trying to change the monitor type to a number not listed for that graphics device fails and
gives you the following warning message:
Value of monitor type
n
out of range (
n
-
nn
)
Trying to change the monitor type on an empty slot fails and gives you the following
warning message:
No such graphics card.
Setting the Monitor Type at Power On
If you replace your workstation’s monitor with a different monitor type, you need to let the
computer’s firmware know you made this change. To do this, reboot the workstation and
use either the automatic monitor selection process or the boot console handler’s monitor
command. The monitor command is described in the section “Setting the Monitor Type” on
page 172. The automatic monitor selection process is described in this section.
Once you have rebooted the system by turning it off, wait for a short time for the hard disk
drive’s disk to stop spinning. Next, turn the workstation on and watch for the Num Lock
light to flash.
NOTE
It takes approximately one to two minutes after powering on the workstation
before the Num Lock light flashes.
Wait two seconds after the Num Lock light comes on, which is near the end of the boot
sequence, then press Tab to initiate the automatic monitor selection process. If your screen
remains blank after two minutes of waiting for something to be displayed, see the section
“Troubleshooting Monitor Problems” in this chapter. Otherwise, if you see information
similar to the following displayed on your screen and it is the correct monitor type, press
the Enter key to select it.
MONITOR INFORMATION
Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class
------ ------ ---- ----- ------- ----- -------
GRAPHICS(2) 2 1
n nnnnxnnnn nn
Hz PCI
Press[RETURN]to select this monitor type(type
n
of
n
types)
Note that if you do not select this monitor type, the system cycles through all of the
available monitor types one at a time until you find one that meets your needs.
Once you have made your monitor type selection, the system queries you to confirm your
selection. Press Y to save this monitor type.
If you press any key other than Y, the following message is displayed:
Monitor type not saved.
174 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
Displaying and Setting the Monitor Type
At this point, the new monitor type is active, but not saved. Because you didn’t save the
monitor type, the next time you reboot the system the original monitor type will be used.
Next, the following message is displayed:
To select a new Graphics Monitor Type press the <TAB> key now,
otherwise EXIT by entering any other key (or will time out in 15
seconds)...
To restart the monitor selection process, press Tab.
Troubleshooting Monitor Problems
In the event that your console stops displaying to your graphics device, use the following
procedure to set the console for displaying to an external terminal.
1. Turn the workstation power off.
2. Disconnect the USB keyboard connector from the rear panel.
3. Connect a serial terminal emulator to the Serial 1 connector (the left serial connector)
on the system rear panel. Configure the terminal for: 9600 baud, No Stop Bits, No
Parity, and 8 Bits.
4. Power on the system. The system will now display the console to the terminal connected
to Serial 1 port. Note that you can use a 9-pin to 9-pin serial cable (HP Part Number
F1044-80002) to connect an HP Omnibook serial port to the workstation.
5. Set the monitor type and path using the Boot Console Handler. For information,
reference the section “Displaying and Setting the Monitor Type” on page 170.
Chapter 6 175
Boot Console Handler
Displaying the Current Memory Configuration
Displaying the Current Memory Configuration
The following sample screen output uses the memory command to show a memory
configuration table with properly-installed and configured memory.
To display the current memory configuration for you system, from the Information Menu of
the boot console handler, follow the directions in “Accessing the Boot Console Handler” on
page 158. Once you are in the Boot Console Handler Main Menu, type the following at the
prompt and press Enter:
Main Menu: Enter command> information
This places you in the Information Menu. From here, type the following at the prompt and
press Enter:
Information Menu: Enter command> memory
The screen displays status and configuration information for the memory DIMMs installed
in the workstation. See the section, “Memory Information Sample” on page 176
176 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
Displaying the Current Memory Configuration
Memory Information Sample
The following sample shows the memory information when memory modules are properly
installed and configured:
MEMORY INFORMATION
MEMORY STATUS TABLE
Slot Size Status
----- -------- ------
0 256MB Active
1 256MB Active
2 128MB Active
---------
TOTAL MEMORY = 640MB
MEMORY FAULT TABLE
Slot Size Status
----- ------ ------------
Active, Installed Memory : 640MB of SDRAM
Deallocated Pages : 0 Pages
---------------------------
Available Memory : 640 MB
Good Memory Required by OS : 0 (not initialized)
Memory
HVERSION SVERSION
-------- ---------
0×0860 0×0900
Chapter 6 177
Boot Console Handler
Displaying the Status of the I/O slots
Displaying the Status of the I/O slots
The I/O command lets you identify all built-in I/O devices and optional I/O devices
installed in the option slots. It is available in the Information Menu.
To use the IO command from the Information Menu of the boot console, type the following
command at the prompt and press Enter:
Information Menu: Enter command> IO
Information about the built-in and optional I/O devices is displayed.
I/O MODULE INFORMATION
Path Decimal Type Location HVER SVER Vers Dep
---- ------- ---- -------- ---- ---- ---- ---
LAN 10/0/12/0 Ethernet built-in 0060 a200 0x02 0x00
AUDIO 10/0/13/0 Audio built-in
IDE 10/0/14/0 IDE built-in 0060 a300 0x00 0x00
SUPERIO MISC 10/0/14/0 Bridge Device built-in
FLOPPY 10/0/14/1/0 Floppy Disk built-in
SERIAL_1 10/0/14/1/1 RS232 port built-in 0060 8c00 0x01 0x00
SERIAL_2 10/0/14/1/2 RS232 port built-in 0060 8c00 0x01 0x00
PARALLEL 10/0/14/1/3 Parallel port built-in
USB 10/0/14/2 USB built-in 0060 a900 0x95 0x00
SCSI 10/0/15/0 SCSI built-in 0060 a300 0x00 0x00
FWSCSI 10/0/15/1 SCSI built-in 0060 a300 0x00 0x00
GRAPHICS(2) 10/6/2/0 Display slot2 0070 8500 0x01 0x00
Main Menu: Enter command>
178 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags
Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags
The auto boot and auto search flags are variables stored in your workstation’s
nonvolatile memory. (Non-volatile memory retains its contents even after power is turned
off.) If you reset these flags to a new value, the change takes effect the next time you reboot
the workstation.
The auto boot flag boots the operating system whenever the workstation is turned on.
To examine the state of the auto boot and auto search flags, type the following at the
prompt and press Enter:
Configuration Menu: Enter command> auto
If auto boot is set to on, your workstation automatically attempts to boot the operating
system when turned on. If auto boot is set to off, your workstation enters the boot
administration mode of the Boot Console Handler.
The state of the auto search flag determines how your workstation seeks a boot device
during autoboot. If auto search is set to on, your workstation will search for other boot
devices if the primary boot device is not available. If auto search is off, your workstation
will default to the boot administration mode if it can’t see the primary boot device.
To change the state of the auto boot or auto search flags, type the following at the prompt
and press Enter:
Config Menu: Enter command> auto boot
state
or
Config Menu: Enter command> auto search
state
where state is on or off.
Auto search searches for devices in the following order:
Primary Boot Path (can be set by the user)
Alternate Boot Path (can be set by the user)
Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI (built-in)
PCI 1 through PCI 6 (plug-in interface cards)
Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI (built-in)
LAN (built-in)
Chapter 6 179
Boot Console Handler
Displaying and Setting the Security Mode
Displaying and Setting the Security Mode
The secure flag is a variable stored in non-volatile memory. (Non-volatile memory retains
its contents even after power is turned off.) If you reset this flag to a new value, the change
takes effect the next time you reboot the computer.
When the secure flag is set to on, auto boot and auto search are enabled and cannot be
stopped. The system boots from the default boot paths regardless of user intervention.
Note that the secure command must be executed from within the Boot Console Handler.
For information, reference the section “Accessing the Boot Console Handler” on page 158.
Once the Main Menu is present, type the following command at the prompt and press
Enter:
Main Menu: Enter command> configuration
To display the current setting for the secure flag, type the following command at the
prompt and press Enter:
Configuration Menu: Enter command> secure
To set the secure flag on, type the following command at the prompt and press Enter:
Configuration Menu: Enter command> secure on
To set the secure flag off, you need to disconnect all possible boot devices to interrupt the
boot-up sequence and force the prompt to the Boot Console Handler. Next, type the
following command at the prompt and press Enter:
Configuration Menu: Enter command> secure off
180 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
Displaying and Setting Fastboot Mode
Displaying and Setting Fastboot Mode
When fastboot is enabled (set to on), the workstation does a quick check of the memory
and skips some processor self tests during the power-on self tests. This enables the
workstation to complete its boot process quicker. The default factory setting is for
fastboot to be enabled (set to on).
When fastboot is disabled (set to off), more extensive memory and processor testing is
performed during the self tests, causing the boot process to take longer.
If you are experiencing difficulty in booting the workstation, set fastboot to off and reboot
the system. The more extensive testing may reveal the error condition.
To display the status of fastboot, type the following at the prompt and press Enter:
Configuration Menu: Enter command> fastboot
To disable fastboot, type the following and press Enter:
Configuration Menu: Enter command> fastboot off
To enable fastboot, type the following and press Enter:
Configuration Menu: Enter command> fastboot on
Chapter 6 181
Boot Console Handler
Displaying and Setting the LAN Station Address
Displaying and Setting the LAN Station Address
It is sometimes necessary to supply the LAN station address of the workstation to other
users. For example, if the workstation is to become a member of a cluster, the cluster
administrator needs to know your LAN station address in order to add your workstation to
the cluster. Note that the LAN station address can be determined using the Boot Console
Handler Information Menu.
A LAN station address for the workstation is the label that uniquely identifies the LAN
connection for the workstation at the link level (the hardware level).
To display the workstation’s LAN station address, type the following at the prompt and
press Enter:
Information Menu: Enter command> lanaddress
The LAN station address is displayed as a twelve-digit number in hexadecimal notation,
similar to the following:
LAN Station Address: 001083-000429
The address is for the workstation’s built-in LAN interface.
182 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
Displaying System Information
Displaying System Information
The all command allows you to display the system’s processor revision and speed, cache
size, memory size, flag settings, and the boot and console paths. To display system
information from the Information Menu, type the following at the prompt and press Enter:
Information Menu: Enter command> all
This information is paged to allow you to view it as necessary, unless the ScRoll command
has been used to disable scrolling.
Chapter 6 183
Boot Console Handler
Displaying PIM Information
Displaying PIM Information
The pim command allows you to display the most recent PIM information for the specified
fault type. To display PIM information for a specific fault, from the Service Menu, type the
following at the prompt and press Enter:
Service Menu: Enter command > pim
processor_number fault_type
You can use pim in the following ways:
pim - No arguments for the pim command returns the HPMC information for processor 0
pim 0 - HPMC information on processor 0
pim 0 fault_type - fault type information on processor 0
where fault_type is HPMC (high priority machine check), LPMC (low priority machine check),
or TOC (transfer of control).
184 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
Stable Storage
Stable Storage
Stable storage is non-volatile memory associated with the PA-RISC processor module.
Stable storage is used by the processor (CPU) to store:
• Device path information
• The state of the boot flags
• HPMC error information
• Operating system initialization data
Chapter 6 185
Boot Console Handler
ISL Environment
ISL Environment
The ISL environment provides the means to load the operating system (HP-UX)
environment. The ISL environment also provides an offline platform to execute optional
diagnostic and utility programs from a boot device when HP-UX does not load.
The ISL program is the first program loaded into main memory from an external medium
(LAN, disk, or tape) and launched by the initial program loader (IPL) routine from the
Boot Administration environment.
The ISL environment provides the following capabilities:
• Execute user-entered commands to modify boot device paths and boot options in stable
storage.
• Run offline diagnostic programs and utilities
• Provide automatic booting of the HP-UX operating system after power-on or reset
Invoking ISL from the Boot Console Handler
Perform the following steps to invoke ISL from the boot console handler:
Step 1. Follow the directions in “Accessing the Boot Console Handler” on page 158, and
then type the following at the prompt and press Enter:
Main Menu: Enter command > boot
device
You are prompted:
Interact with ISL (Y, N, or Q) > y
Step 2. Answering yes (y) causes the ISL to be loaded from the specified device. After a
short time, the following prompt appears on your screen:
ISL>
ISL is the program that actually controls the loading of the operating system. By
interacting with ISL, you can choose to load an alternate version of the HP-UX
operating system.
For example, if the usual kernel (/stand/vmunix) on your root disk (fwscsi.6.0)
has become corrupted, and you wish to boot the workstation from the backup
kernel (/stand/vmunix.prev), type the following at the ISL> prompt and press
Enter:
ISL> hpux /stand/vmunix.prev
ISL User Commands
The following commands available in the ISL environment allow you to display and modify
the boot characteristics of the system.
•help - lists ISL command menu and available utilities.
186 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
ISL Environment
•display - displays the boot and console paths in Stable Storage and the current setting
of the ISL Boot Flags.
•primpath - modifies the primary boot path entry in Stable Storage. The entry in Stable
Storage for the primary boot device begins at byte address 0 and ends at byte address
31.
•altpath - modifies the alternate boot path entry in Stable Storage. The entry for the
alternate boot device begins at byte address 128 and ends at 159.
•conspath - modifies the console path entry in Stable Storage. The console device begins
at byte address 96 and ends at byte address 127. The entry for the keyboard and mouse
devices begins at byte address 160 and ends at 191.
•listautofl or lsautofl - lists the contents of the (HP-UX) autoboot file.
•support - boots the Support Tape from the boot device.
•readss - displays 4 bytes (one word) from Stable Storage. The readss command
requires a decimal number between 0 and 255 to address four bytes in Stable Storage.
Chapter 6 187
Boot Console Handler
Obtaining and Updating System Firmware
Obtaining and Updating System Firmware
To update a system’s firmware, the firmware patch must be obtained from the patch server
website at http://us-external_support.hp.com or http://europe-external_support.hp.com.
The patch file is a combined shar’ed file that contains an ASCII cataloging file, a readme
type ASCII file, and the firmware LIF binary file. The LIF volume is bootable to ODE
which in turns runs the UPDATER utility to download the firmware image files.
Creating the Firmware Update Tape (on any HP-UX system)
Step 1. Verify the checksum of the file ".FRM" using the "sum" command. Results of the
command should be equal to the "sum" value as documented in the header of this
document.
Step 2. Use the "dd" command to copy the file "CXXXXXXX.FRM" to tape, as follows: dd
if=CXXXXXX.FRM of=/dev/rmt/0m bs=2k
(device path dependent)
NOTE: Blocksize (bs) must be = 2k
Identify Current Version of Firmware (on system to be updated)
Step 1. Re-boot your system and do the following:
a. Interrupt the boot process and from the Boot Console Handler prompt, type
<information> and press [return].
b. Identify your firmware revision. The last two digits in the patch name indicate
the revision. In this case, X.X is the revision. If the revision on your system is
equal to or higher than X.X, do not proceed with the update.
To install the firmware update
The following are the directions from the readme file that are the firmware updating
instructions for a DAT tape drive:
Step 1. Install the tape you have just created into your tape drive.
Step 2. Shutdown your system via the power switch and power back on, or execute the
reboot command resetting your system.
Step 3. When the display reads "Searching for a system to boot" press [escape]. At the
BOOT ADMIN prompt, type search and press Enter or Return to identify the tape
device path.
Step 4. Boot from the appropriate boot path. (You must boot from the device that
contains the firmware update tape.) When the display reads “Interact with
IPL (Y, N, Q)>”, type N and press Enter.
188 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
Obtaining and Updating System Firmware
NOTE
This process is automatic and requires no interaction until directed to do so.
Please do not interrupt the process. The load process will take about 2
minutes.
Step 5. A warning message will be issued, followed by "Continue ([y]/n)?” type yand
press Enter if you wish to continue. Be sure the image on the tape is a newer
version than that on your system before proceeding.
After several screens go by, you will be informed as to what firmware image is on
your system and which image is on the tape. You will be asked if you want to
proceed. "Continue ([y]/n)?"
If the image on the tape has a higher revision number, type <y> and press Enter.
If no, then type n and press Enter.
NOTE
FROM THIS POINT FORWARD, THIS PROCESS CANNOT BE
INTERRUPTED UNTIL COMPLETION. INTERRUPTING THIS PROCESS
WILL CAUSE YOUR SYSTEM TO BE INOPERATIVE.
DURING THE EXECUTION OF THIS UPDATE, THE FIRMWARE FONTS
FILE WILL BE RE-WRITTEN. IF THESE ARE NEW FONTS, YOU WILL
NOT SEE ANY TEXT WRITTEN TO THE SCREEN AFTER THE
MESSAGE.
You will see 2 carriage returns and 2 line feeds and then the display will remain
the same. In approximately 40 seconds the system will automatically re-boot. If it
doesn’t, the update has failed. Attempt to run the update again from Step 2. If it
still fails, or you cannot get to the Boot Administration prompt, call your HP
Service Representative.
The system will continue the normal boot process from the default primary path.
Firmware Update Example
When you update the firmware, you will see the following information on the display.
Chapter 6 189
Boot Console Handler
Obtaining and Updating System Firmware
launch IPL other
ISL Revision A.00.38 OCT 26, 1994
ISL booting ode fupdate; update pdc
***************************************************************************
****** ******
****** Offline Diagnostic Environment ******
****** ******
****** (C) Copyright Hewlett-Packard Co 1993-1998 ******
****** All Rights Reserved ******
****** ******
****** HP shall not be liable for any damages resulting from the ******
****** use of this program. ******
****** ******
****** TC Version A.02.14 ******
****** SysLib Version A.00.69 ******
****** Loader Version A.00.47 ******
****** Mapfile Version A.01.03 ******
****** ******
***************************************************************************
Type HELP for command information.
ISL_CMD> fupdate; update pdc
***************************************************************************
****** ******
****** FUPDATE ******
****** ******
****** Copyright (C) 1996-1998 by Hewlett-Packard Company ******
****** All Rights Reserved ******
****** ******
****** HP shall not be liable for any damages resulting from the ******
****** use of this program. ******
****** ******
****** Version A.01.05 ******
****** ******
***************************************************************************
Please wait while I map the system: Done.
190 Chapter6
Boot Console Handler
Obtaining and Updating System Firmware
Cannot get module’s product string. Continuing
Please wait while I examine the LIF for F/W files: Done.
Type HELP for command information.
File Name | Intended Product | Version
------------+--------------------------------+----------
PDC | Forte/Allegro Firmware (PDC) | 1.1
**************************************************************
* WARNING! *
* Downloading incorrect F/W to a module can cause permanent *
* damage to the module or card you are downloading to. *
* DO NOT INTERRUPT THIS PROCESS OR THE MODULE MAY BE DAMAGED!*
**************************************************************
F/W file Note:
Built Tue Mar 9 10:11:58 MST 1999 by fwbtr.
Continue ([y]/n)? y
**************************************************************
* CPU Firmware will now be downloaded. It should take no *
* more then 2 minutes. When the Firmware is successfully *
* downloaded the CPU will automatically reboot. However, if *
* The download failed and the system is hung, you will most *
* probably have to replace the Flash Memory chip manually. *
* Rebooting manually may work but most likely will not. *
**************************************************************
**************************************************************
* Firmware downloaded SUCCESSFULLY! *
**************************************************************
THIS UTILITY WILL NOW RESET THE SYSTEM....
191
AProduct Specifications
This appendix lists the regulatory specifications, safety requirements, environmental
specifications, and electrical specifications for the HP VISUALIZE B1000/C3000
workstations.
192 AppendixA
Product Specifications
Regulatory and Safety Statements
Regulatory and Safety Statements
This section lists the regulatory and safety statements for the B1000 and the C3000
workstations.
Appendix A 193
Product Specifications
Regulatory and Safety Statements
194 AppendixA
Product Specifications
Regulatory and Safety Statements
Emissions Regulations
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules and Canadian Department of
Communications. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communication. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment
does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (determined by turning the
equipment off and on), you can correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Ask the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.
Hewlett-Packard’s system certification tests were conducted with HP-supported peripheral
devices and HP shielded cables, such as those you receive with your computer. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Operation of this device is subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
• Cables used with this device must be properly shielded to comply with the
requirements of the FCC.
Special Video Configuration Statement
When a Video Out card has a cable connected to its video out connector, the HP Visualize
B1000/C3000 workstation no longer meets FCC Class B regulations. The workstation now
becomes FCC Class A compliant. This statement applies only to those applications which
include a cable connected to the video out connector on a Video Out card. No modification
to the regulatory statements is necessary for applications which include cables connected
to other connectors on the card, but not to the Video Out connector.
Appendix A 195
Product Specifications
Regulatory and Safety Statements
Figure A-1. VCCI Class B ITE (Japan)
Figure A-2. RRL Class A EMI (Korea)
Figure A-3. EMI Class A (Taiwan)
Emissions Regulations Compliance
Any third-party I/O device installed in HP system(s) must be in accordance with the
requirements set forth in the preceding Emissions Regulations statements: In the event
that a third-party noncompliant I/O device is installed, the customer assumes all
196 AppendixA
Product Specifications
Regulatory and Safety Statements
responsibility and liability arising therefrom.
Acoustics
Regulation On Noise Declaration For Machines -3. GSGV
Lpa <70dB Lpa <70dB
operator position am Arbeitsplatz
normal operation normaler Betrieb
per ISO 7779 nach DIN 45635 T.19
Laser Safety Statement (U.S.A.)
(For workstations that have a CD drive installed.)
The CD-ROM mass-storage system is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard
according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968.
This means that the mass-storage system does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
Because laser light emitted inside the mass-storage system is completely confined within
protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine
during any phase of user operation.
LEDs
The LEDs on this product are classified as “Class 1 LED PRODUCT” in accordance with
EN 60825-1.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions
Electrostatic charges can damage the integrated circuits on printed circuits boards. To
prevent such damage from occurring, observe the following precautions during board
unpacking and installation:
• Stand on a static-free mat.
• Wear a static strap to ensure that any accumulated electrostatic charge is discharged
from your body to ground.
• Connect all equipment together, including the static-free mat, static strap, routing
nodes, and peripheral units.
• Keep uninstalled printed circuit boards in their protective antistatic bags.
• Handle printed circuit boards by their edges, once you have removed them from their
protective antistatic bags.
Appendix A 197
Product Specifications
Regulatory and Safety Statements
Warnings
pa
198 AppendixA
Product Specifications
Environmental Specifications
Environmental Specifications
Acoustics
Deskside: 4.7 bels typical @ 25˚ C
4.9 bels typical @ 30˚ C
Altitude
Operating: 0-10,000 ft. above sea level (0-3000m)
Non-operating (storage or shipping): 0-15,000 ft. above sea level (0-4500m)
DC Magnetic Field Interference
Operating: <1 Gauss at surface of product
Non-operating: <2 mGauss @ 7 feet
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Emissions: FCC Class B, CISPR B
Immunity: EN61000-4-2: 1995 - 4KV contact discharge, 8KV air discharge (ESD)
EN61000-4-3: 1991 - 10V/m (radiated immunity)
EN61000-4-4: 1995 - 2kV signal lines, 4kV power lines (EFT)
Temperature
Operating: 5 to +40˚ C
Non-operating (shipping or storage): -40 to +70˚ C
Humidity (Non-condensing)
Operating: 15 to 80% RH
Non-operating: 0 to 90% RH (storage or shipping)
Leakage Current
Less than 3 milliamps
Shock
Operating: 20g at 3ms, 1/2 sine in normal axis with no hard errors
Non-operating (shipping): 80g at 3ms, 1/2 sine, normal axis
Appendix A 199
Product Specifications
Environmental Specifications
Vibration
Operating random: 0.21 Grms, 5-500 Hz
Swept sine survival (shipping): 0.5 G (0-peak), 5-500 Hz
Random survival (shipping): 2.09 Grms, 5-500 Hz
200 AppendixA
Product Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Input Power
For B1000 and C3000 workstations:
Line Power
7.4 Amps RMS max @ 100V
6.2 Amps RMS max @ 120V
3.8 Amps RMS max @ 200V
3.2 Amps RMS max @ 230V
AC Frequency: 48-66 Hz
AC Voltage: 90-264V
Maximum Power Input: 805 Watts
Maximum Current Load: 10 Amps
201
BSCSI Connections
This appendix provides information about connecting Small Computer System Interface
(SCSI) devices to an HP VISUALIZE B1000/C3000 workstation.
202 AppendixB
SCSI Connections
The following topics are covered within this section:
• SCSI bus differences
• SCSI restrictions
• Determining SCSI bus length
• Assigning SCSI device IDs
• Connecting to the SCSI ports
If you are on a B1000/C3000 workstation, the instructions in this chapter assume you are
using HP-UX 10.20 operating system and Workstation Additional Core Enhancements for
HP-UX 10.20 (June 1999) with HP CDE (Common Desktop Environment). If you are on a
C3700 workstation, the instructions in this chapter assume you are using HP-UX 11.0 and
Workstation Additional Core Enhancements (ACE) for HP-UX 11.0 (November, 1999) or
HP-UX 11i operating system and the Hardware Enablement Bundle (HWE) for HP-UX 11i
(June, 2001) with HP CDE (Common Desktop Environment).
NOTE
When attaching external SCSI devices, be sure to terminate the last device on
the external SCSI bus. The terminators are shipped with the B1000/C3000
workstations.
Appendix B 203
SCSI Connections
SCSI Bus Differences
SCSI Bus Differences
A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) bus is an IEEE standard bus for connecting
your workstation to internal and external devices (SCSI devices) running at different
speeds. There may be one device connected to the external SCSI port or more than one
device may be daisy chained to a single external SCSI port. Examples of SCSI devices are
4-mm DDS-format tape drives and hard disk drives.
There are two types of SCSI buses available with this workstation—an Ultra Narrow
Single-Ended SCSI bus (NSE SCSI), and an Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI
bus (LVD SCSI). The following table shows the specification differences between these
SCSI buses.
CAUTION
Currently Hewlett-Packard does not support mixing Ultra Narrow
Single-Ended and Ultra2 Wide LVD devices on any one bus type.
Table B-1. SCSI Bus Differences
Type Transfer
Rate Data Bus
Width Available
SCSI
Addresses1
Maximum
Cable Length Device
Physical
Location2
Ultra Narrow
Single-Ended Up to 20
Mbytes/sec 8 bits 0 through 6 3.0 meters
(9.84 feet) External
Ultra2 Wide
Low-Voltage
Differential
Up to 80
Mbytes/sec 16 bits 0 through 6;
8 through 15 12 meters
(39.37 feet) Internal and
external
1. Address 7 is reserved for host controller use on all buses.
2. This information is specific to the HP VISUALIZE B1000/C3000 workstations.
204 AppendixB
SCSI Connections
SCSI Restrictions
SCSI Restrictions
This section describes the SCSI restrictions that apply to your workstation in the following
areas:
• Cables
• Terminators
• Number of Devices Per SCSI Bus
• Considerations for Selecting SCSI Devices
NOTE
The Ultra Narrow, single-ended SCSI bus supports only 7 devices because
address 7 is reserved by the system. The Ultra2 Wide, Low-Voltage
Differential SCSI bus supports 15 devices because address 7 is reserved by
the system.
Cables
Only SCSI cables approved by HP can be used to connect your workstation and any SCSI
devices. HP offers the following SCSI cables for Ultra Narrow single-ended SCSI devices:
Table B-2. Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI Cables
Cable Number Cable
Length Description
C2955A 0.5m 50-pin HDTS1 to 50-pin HDTS
1. High Density Thumb Screw (HDTS)
C2908A 1.0m
C2956A 1.5m
C2957A 2.0m
Appendix B 205
SCSI Connections
SCSI Restrictions
HP offers the following SCSI cables for connecting externally connected devices to the
system Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential port:
CAUTION
SCSI cables approved by HP are designed to function within the SCSI
tolerances for HP devices. Use of other cables can result in significant
problems with system operation.
Always use the shortest possible cable(s) for your configuration.
NOTE
See “Determining SCSI Bus Length” later in this Appendix to determine the
total length of your cables.
Table B-3. Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI Cables
Cable Number Cable
Length Description
C2978A 0.5m 68-pin HDTS1 to 68-pin HDTS
1. High Density Thumbscrew (HDTS)
C2979A 1.5m
C2911B 1.0m
C2924B 2.5m
C2361A 1.0m 68-pin VHDCI2 to 68-pin HDTS
2. Very High Density Cabled Interconnect (VHDCI)
C2362A 2.5m
C2363A 10.0m
C2365A 5.0m
206 AppendixB
SCSI Connections
SCSI Restrictions
Terminators
The terminators for Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI (LVD SCSI) and Ultra
Narrow Single-Ended SCSI (NSE SCSI) are different. The NSE SCSI terminator has 50
pins and will fit on an NSE SCSI connector. The LVD SCSI terminator has 68 pins and will
fit on a LVD SCSI connector. Note that these SCSI terminators were shipped with your
system.
CAUTION
It is necessary to put a terminator on unused SCSI connectors on the back
panel of the system. However, if SCSI devices are attached to the SCSI bus
via these connectors, the external device connected to the SCSI bus must be
terminated with a SCSI terminator. If you do not already have the SCSI
terminators, you must order terminator A1658-63012 (for the 50-pin
terminator; NSE SCSI) or A4986-63008 (for the 68-pin terminator; LVD
SCSI) from Hewlett-Packard.
Number of Devices Per SCSI Bus
The number of SCSI devices per bus is limited (see Table B-1. on page 203). Before adding
another SCSI device, determine if the system can support the additional device.
This workstation offers the following types of SCSI buses, each with their own
configuration constraints:
• Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI bus
• Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI bus
Considerations for Selecting SCSI Devices
SCSI devices supported by the Hewlett-Packard Company for the Ultra Narrow
Single-Ended (NSE) and Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential (LVD) SCSI buses have
been qualified as SCSI devices which meet NSE and LVD specifications. Contact the local
HP sales representative for a current list of SCSI devices supported by HP for use on the
Ultra Narrow Single-Ended and Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI buses.
If devices other than those supported by HP are connected to the Ultra Narrow
Single-Ended or the Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI bus on this system, they
must adhere to cabling, termination and bus length restrictions discussed in this chapter
to assure functionality of the SCSI busses.
Because Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI is a relatively new technology, there
can be products which are advertised as LVD compliant, but may not meet LVD
specifications. Therefore, additional caution must be exercised when choosing Ultra2 Wide
Low-Voltage Differential SCSI bus on this system. For example, the cabling inside one of
these devices in question may not have a differential impedance between 110 ohms and
135 ohms and it may be constructed in a way such that the device has considerable
crosstalk on critical signals, such as Reset, Select and Busy. Failure to strictly adhere to
the Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI bus specifications will impact the
performance of the LVD bus. The Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential interface is a much
Appendix B 207
SCSI Connections
SCSI Restrictions
higher performance SCSI bus than previous SCSI buses and is more sensitive to
adherence to the electrical specifications.
Low-voltage differential signaling specifications are described in the SCSI Parallel
Interface-2 (SPI-2) document and in the Electrical Characteristics of Low Voltage
Differential Signaling (LVDS) Interface Circuits TIA/EIA-644 document. Both of these
documents can be obtained from:
Global Engineering Documents
15 Inverness Way East
Englewood, CO 80112-5704
(800) 854-7179 or (303) 397-7956
208 AppendixB
SCSI Connections
SCSI Bus Length Constraints
SCSI Bus Length Constraints
This section discusses SCSI bus length constraints for the Ultra Narrow Single-Ended
SCSI bus and the Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI bus.
Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI Bus Length
The maximum cable length for a Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI bus is 3 meters. The
HP VISUALIZE B1000/C3000 system uses a negligible amount of this maximum cable
length.
NOTE
When calculating the total Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI cable/bus/trace
length used externally, remember to account for cables connecting external
devices together as well as the bus length internal to those devices.
There are two total cable length specifications that apply to the Ultra Narrow
Single-Ended SCSI bus on the workstation. Note that these specifications are based on the
requirement that the SCSI device being connected to the NSE SCSI bus does not exceed
the maximum capacitance of 25 picofarads (pF). Check with the vendor of the SCSI device
for the maximum capacitance specification.
The total cable length specifications are described below:
• For a total of one to four devices being connected to the NSE SCSI bus the total length
of cable used should not exceed 3.0 meters
• For a total of five to eight devices being connected to the NSE SCSI bus the total length
of cable used should not exceed 1.5 meters.
NOTE
Remember that the workstation is counted as one of the total device, and the
internal length of its cabling is 0.15 meters. This length needs to be
considered in your total cable length determination.
Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI Bus Length
The maximum cable length for a Ultra Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI bus is 12
meters. The HP VISUALIZE B1000/C3000 system uses 1 meter of this maximum cable
length internally. This means that up to 11 meters of cable can be used for connecting
external Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI devices to this workstation.
Appendix B 209
SCSI Connections
SCSI Bus Length Constraints
NOTE
When calculating the total Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI
cable/bus/trace length used externally, remember to account for cables
connecting external devices together as well as the bus length internal to
those devices.
210 AppendixB
SCSI Connections
Assigning SCSI Device IDs
Assigning SCSI Device IDs
Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check the existing SCSI
device IDs. To determine which SCSI device IDs are available for your device, use the
ioscan command in a terminal window:
1. At a command line prompt, enter the following:
/usr/sbin/ioscan -f
After a few moments, the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could find. The
list appears similar to the following:
Class I H/W Path Driver S/W State H/W Type Description
=============================================================================
bc 0 root CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS
bc 1 10 ccio2 CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I/O Adapter
ba 0 10/0 ROPEtoPCI CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS PCI Bus Bridge - ROPEtoPCI
graphics 0 10/0/1/0 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE PCI(103c1005)
lan 0 10/0/12/0 btlan3 CLAIMED INTERFACE PCI(10110019)
audio 0 10/0/13/0 audio CLAIMED INTERFACE PCI(11d41189)
ext_bus 0 10/0/14/0 side CLAIMED INTERFACE PCI(100b0002)
target 0 10/0/14/0.0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE
disk 0 10/0/14/0.0.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE TEAC CD-532E-B
target 0 10/0/14/0.7 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE
ctl 0 10/0/14/0.7.0 sctl CLAIMED DEVICE Initiator
ba 1 10/0/14/1 superio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS PCI Core I/O Adapter
tty 0 10/0/14/1/1 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C
tty 1 10/0/14/1/2 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C
ext_bus 1 10/0/14/1/3 SCentIf CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Parallel Interface
siopc 0 10/0/14/1/4 siofdc CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Floppy Drive
floppy 0 10/0/14/1/4.1 sioflop CLAIMED DEVICE HP_PC_FDC_FLOPPY
usb 0 10/0/14/2 hcd CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in USB Interface
usbhub 0 10/0/14/2.1 hub CLAIMED DEVICE USB Root Hub
ext_bus 2 10/0/15/0 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI
target 1 10/0/15/0.7 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE
ctl 1 10/0/15/0.7.0 sctl CLAIMED DEVICE Initiator
ext_bus 3 10/0/15/1 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE Ultra2 Wide LVD SCSI
target 2 10/0/15/1.6 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE
disk 0 10/0/15/1.6.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST39102LC
target 3 10/0/15/1.7 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE
ctl 2 10/0/15/1.7.0 sctl CLAIMED DEVICE Initiator
ba 2 10/1 ROPEtoPCI CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS PCI Bus Bridge - ROPEtoPCI
ba 3 10/2 ROPEtoPCI CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS PCI Bus Bridge - ROPEtoPCI
ba 4 10/4 ROPEtoPCI CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS PCI Bus Bridge - ROPEtoPCI
ba 5 10/6 ROPEtoPCI CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS PCI Bus Bridge - ROPEtoPCI
processor 0 32 processor CLAIMED PROCESSOR Processor
processor 1 34 processor CLAIMED PROCESSOR Processor
memory 0 49 memory CLAIMED MEMORY Memory
Appendix B 211
SCSI Connections
Assigning SCSI Device IDs
Assigning Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI Device IDs
You can determine which Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI (NSE SCSI) devices are
currently in use by reviewing the output from the ioscan command discussed above and
looking under the “H/W Path” heading. The entry 10/0/15/0 is the built-in Ultra Narrow
Single-Ended SCSI bus. For devices connected to the built-in Ultra Narrow Single-Ended
SCSI bus, such as disks, the number between the two decimals and after the third “/” in
the hardware path specifies the SCSI ID for that device. For example, a hardware path of
10/0/15/0.2.0 specifies a NSE SCSI device at SCSI ID 2.
Here is the break down of the hardware path:
SCSI device 10/0/15/0.2.0
NSE SCSI 10/0/15/0.2.0
SCSI ID 2 10/0/15/0.2.0
CAUTION
Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. It is reserved for the built-in SCSI
bus controller.
Assigning Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI Device IDs
You can determine which Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI (LVD SCSI) devices
are currently in use by reviewing the output from the ioscan command discussed above
and looking under the “H/W Path” heading. The entry 10/0/15/1 is the built-in Ultra2
Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI bus. For devices connected to the built-in Ultra2 Wide
Low-Voltage Differential SCSI bus, such as disks, the number between the two decimals
and after the third “/” in the hardware path specifies the SCSI ID for that device. For
example, a hardware path of 10/0/15/1.5.0 specifies a LVD SCSI device at SCSI ID 5.
Here is the break down of the hardware path:
SCSI device 10/0/15/1.5.0
LVD SCSI 10/0/15/1.5.0
SCSI ID 5 10/0/15/1.5.0
CAUTION
Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. It is reserved for the built-in SCSI
bus controller.
212 AppendixB
SCSI Connections
Connecting to the SCSI Ports
Connecting to the SCSI Ports
This section describes how to connect to the system SCSI ports (Ultra Narrow
Single-Ended and Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential).
System SCSI Port Connection
The system contains two SCSI connectors:
• Ultra Narrow, Single-Ended SCSI (NSE SCSI) connector
• Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential SCSI (LVD SCSI) connector
Figure B-1 shows the two SCSI connectors. SCSI cables connect to these ports with a
high-density thumbscrew connector.
Figure B-1. SCSI Ports
Ultra2 Wide
LVD SCSI
Ultra Narrow Single-Ended SCSI
Connector (Connect Terminator)
Connector
(Connect
Terminator)
Appendix B 213
SCSI Connections
Connecting to the SCSI Ports
NOTE
It is necessary to put a terminator on unused SCSI connectors on the rear
panel, or the last device connected to the SCSI bus. Terminators are shipped
with the system. Only use a NSE SCSI terminator for the NSE SCSI bus and
a FW LVD terminator for the FW LVD SCSI bus.
214 AppendixB
SCSI Connections
Connecting to the SCSI Ports
215
CRelated Documentation
This appendix provides part numbers and titles to related documentation.
216 AppendixC
Related Documentation
Installation Manual
• A4985-90010 - HP VISUALIZE B1000/C3000 Installation Card
Service Manuals
• B2355-90040 - System Administration Tasks Manual HP 9000 Series 700
• B3782-90176 - Support Media User’s Manual
• A4033-90099 - HP A4032/A4033 Color Monitors CE Handbook
Reference Manuals
• A5992-90001 - HP VISUALIZE B1000/C3000 Owner’s Guide
217
Glossary
A
absolute pathname The full
pathname of a file, including all
the directories leading to it,
starting with the root directory
(“/”) and ending with the filename
itself See also file, filename,
pathname.
access permissions Settingsthat
allow (or prevents) a user or group
of users to read, write, or execute
files See also file access
permissions.
active window The window that
is receiving input from the
keyboard at the present time. If
there is no active window,
anything you type is lost. Only one
window can be the active window.
ANSI The American National
Standards Institute, a non-profit
organization, made up of various
expert committees, that publishes
standards for use by national
industries. ANSI has adopted the
IEEE standards for local area
networks.
argument A part of a command
line or line of source code that
identifies the file, directory, or
other data to be used; a parameter.
attachment unit interface
(AUI) A transceiver cable that
conforms to IEEE 802.3
specifications.
B
back up v. To make a copy of one
or more files on a tape or disk that
can be stored separately from the
original files.
backup n. A spare copy of one or
more files on a tape or disk that
can be used to restore data into its
original location.
bitmap Generally speaking, an
array of data bits that define a
graphical image. Strictly speaking,
a bitmap is a pixmap whose depth
is one bit, capable of representing
two-color (black-and-white)
images.
boot Short for “bootstrap,” from
the phrase “pulling oneself up by
one’s bootstraps.” Indicates the
beginning of a process from the
lowestpossiblelevel. A boot service
is provided by a short program,
stored in the boot ROM (read-only
memory) of your workstation, that
loads the operating system (or any
complex program) into main
memory. Partner workstations
provide bootstrap service to
218
Glossary
diskless workstations. See also
boot ROM.
boot console handler The
interactive firmware that enables
you to interact with the hardware
of your workstation before the
workstation boots the operating
system. The boot console interface
allows you to perform special
tasks, display information, and set
certain system parameters.
boot ROM A read-only memory
that is incorporated into a
workstation for the purpose of
loading and starting the operating
system, and modifying the
configuration or changing the
booting behavior.
bootstrap service See boot.
byte A fundamental
character-code unit, usually
consisting of 8 bits.
C
CD-RAM Compact Disk
Random-Access Memory. See
also CD-RAM disk, CD-RAM drive.
CD-RAM disk CD-RAM disks are
identical to the audio compact
disks (CDs) used to record stereo
music, except computer data is
read from and written to these
disks. CD-RAM disks are 120 mm
(4.7 inches) in diameter, use one
data surface, and have a capacity
of about 650 MB. The data surface
contains pits and flat spots
arranged in a continuous spiral
track, which is read at a constant
linear speed.
CD-RAM drive A random-access,
read/write, mass-storage device
that uses removable CD-RAM
disks. The drive contains a
semiconductor laser for reading
and writing data optically and an
embedded controller.
CD-ROM Compact Disk
Read-Only Memory. See also
CD-ROM disk, CD-ROM drive.
CD-ROM disk CD-ROM disks are
identical to the audio compact
disks (CDs) used to record stereo
music, except that they store
computer data. CD-ROM disks are
120 mm (4.7 inches) in diameter,
use one data surface, and have a
capacity of about 650 MB. The data
surface contains pits and flat spots
arranged in a continuous spiral
track, which is read at a constant
linear speed.
CD-ROM drive A random-access,
read-only,mass-storagedevicethat
Glossary
219
uses removable CD-ROM disks.
The drive contains a
semiconductor laser for reading
data optically and an embedded
controller.
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
The part of a workstation that
interprets and executes
instructions; the “brain.”
child directory See
subdirectory.
click To press and immediately
release a mouse button. The term
comes from the fact that pressing
and releasing most mouse buttons
makes a clicking sound. Compare
drag and drop.
cluster A group of workstations
connected via a Local Area
Network (LAN). One workstation,
the cluster server, acts as a
file-system server for the cluster
clients. See also cluster client,
cluster node, cluster server.
cluster client. Aclusternodethat
does not have a local HP-UX file
system. Its file system resides on
the cluster server. See also
cluster, cluster node, cluster server.
cluster node A member of a
group of workstations connected
via a Local Area Network (LAN).
One workstation, the cluster
server, acts as a file server to the
other machines in the cluster.
See also cluster, cluster client,
cluster server.
cluster server Aworkstationthat
provides file access, login access,
file transfer, printing, and other
services across a network to a
defined cluster of systems (cluster
nodes) connected via a LAN. See
also cluster, cluster client, cluster
node, host.
cold install. A process that
requires the booting of an install
kernel from an install server over a
network or from a CD-ROM and
answering some configuration
questions.
command. An instruction that
you enter into the system at a
prompt, to execute a program or
perform a task. See also shell
command.
command argument
Information you provide on a
command line to describe the
object (often a file or directory) to
be operated on by the command.
220
Glossary
command interpreter A
program that reads lines of text
from standard input (typed at the
keyboard or read from a file) and
interprets them as requests to
execute commands or programs.
An HP-UX command interpreter is
called a shell. See also shell.
command option Information
you provide on a command line to
indicate any special action you
want the command to take, or
mode in which to operate. See
also default.
configuration The arrangement
of a workstation or network as
defined by the nature, number, and
chief characteristics of its
functional units. More specifically,
the term “configuration” may refer
to a hardware configuration or a
software configuration.
console. The tty (terminal) the
system was booted from. The
console is associated with the
monitor where all system
messages are displayed. The
system administrator sends
messages to other system users
from this tty.
control key sequence A
keystroke combination used as a
shorthand way of specifying
commands. To enter a control key
sequence, hold down the “Ctrl” key
while pressing another key.
cpu See Central Processing
Unit.
current directory See current
working directory.
current session The work and
processes that have been created
since you logged into the system
(and before you log out again).
See also session.
current working directory The
directory from which a
relative-pathname search begins,
as well as the directory in which
you are currently working. It is
also called the “working directory”
or “current directory.”
cursor The small, usually
blinking, box or underline
displayed in whatever screen or
window is active at any particular
time. The cursor marks your
current typing position on the
screen and indicates which
program (HP CDE terminal
window or shell) will receive your
typed commands.
D
Glossary
221
daisy-chaining A method of
connecting devices in which the
signal passes from one device to
the next in serial fashion along a
bus.
DDS tape drive A device that
stores data on Digital Data
Storage (DDS) cassettes.
default Most commands give you
a choice of one or more options. If
you don’t specify an option, the
command automatically assigns
one.This automatic optioniscalled
the “default.” See also command
option.
dialog box A special type of HP
CDE screen that contains controls
and settings, and with which the
user can carry on an interactive
“dialog” in the process of setting
whatever parameters the dialog
box requests. To display an
example of a dialog box, click the
Style Manager button on the
Workspace Manager’s front panel,
then click on Color.
DIMM See Dual In-line Memory
Module.
Dual In-line Memory Module A
memory board whose connectors
on each side of the board are
connected to different chips. This
allows for a wider data path as
more modules can be accessed at
the same time.
directory A special type of
“container” object that contains
information about the objects
beneath it in the HP-UX
organizationalstructure.Basically,
it is a file that stores names and
links to files and other
directories See also file.
disk A thin, round plate with a
magnetic or optical surface coating
on which data is stored by
magnetic or optical means. See
also floppy diskette, hard disk,
CD-ROM disk.
disked workstation A
workstation that has its own hard
disk drive.
diskette See floppy diskette.
double click To press and release
a mouse button twice in rapid
succession. The amount of time
that discriminates between a
double click and two single clicks is
usually user-configurable. Double
clicking usually invokes a
different, but related, function
than single clicking.
drag To move the mouse (and
222
Glossary
hence the pointer on the screen)
while holding down one or more of
its buttons. This process specifies
two separate locations on the
screen for those operations that
require two: the location when the
mouse button is pressed, and the
location when it is released. This is
used, for example, to initiate a
file-copy by pressing the mouse
button on the file to be copied,
dragging the file’s icon to the
destination window, and releasing
the mouse button there. Another
common using of dragging is to
specify the upper-left and
lower-right corners of a new
window or similar rectangle See
also drop.
drive See CD-ROM drive, DDS
tape drive, floppy drive, hard disk
drive
drop To release the mouse button
afterhavingmoved the mouse with
its button held down, in order to
position an icon or other object
that has been “dragged” to a new
position See also drag.
E
EEPROM. Electronically erasable
read-only memory. Usually bytes
or words can be erased and
reprogrammed individually during
system operations. The EEPROM
is used for storing configuration
information that will be
“remembered” after a reboot and
AC power loss.
environment The conditions in
which your commands or programs
are executed. These conditions
include your workstation
characteristics, home directory,
and default search paths Seealso
environment variables.
environment variables The set
of defined shell variables (some of
which are PATH, TERM, SHELL,
EXINIT, and HOME) that define
the conditions in which, or values
with which, your commands are
executed. These conditions and
values include your workstation
characteristics, home directory,
and default search paths Seealso
environment.
Ethernet The LAN developed
jointly by Digital Equipment
Corporation, Intel, and Xerox
Corporation, upon which the IEEE
802.3 network is based.
F
Fast Narrow Single-Ended
SCSI An 8-bit-wide SCSI bus with
standard receivers and drivers
Glossary
223
that runs at 20 Mbytes/second,
which allows a cable length of up
to 3 meters and a transfer rate of
up to 20MB per second See also
Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage
DifferentialSCSI, Small Computer
System Interface.
file The basic named unit of data
stored on disk See also directory,
filename.
file access permissions The
access rights given to a particular
file or directory. Every file and
directory has a set of access
permissions, a code that
determines whether a process can
perform a requested operation on
the file (such as opening the file or
writing to it) See also access
permissions.
File Manager The HP CDE
application that allows you to
manage your files and directories,
and to set viewing preferences.
filename The name given to a
particular file See also absolute
pathname, file, pathname.
file server A workstation whose
primary task is to control the
storage and retrieval of data from
hard disks. Any number of other
workstations can be linked to the
file server via a LAN in order to
use the file server to access data.
file system The hierarchically
organized set of files and
directories on a hard disk.
firmware The control software
that is embedded in ROM and is
always resident regardless of the
status of the operating system. It
handles the booting of the system,
initialization of I/O, and starts the
loading of the operating system.
floppy diskette A thin, flexible,
disk-shaped sheet of plastic that
magnetically stores data on its
coated surfaces. Floppies are
contained within stiff plastic
“envelopes” to protect them from
dust, fingerprints, and abrasion.
The floppy drive uses heads
(similar to heads in tape recorders)
to read and write data on
concentric disk tracks.
floppy drive A device that stores
data on a floppy diskette.
H
hard disk A type of disk that is
rigid—often aluminum—as
opposed to a thin plastic diskette,
which is flexible.
224
Glossary
hard disk drive A device that
stores data on a hard disk. The
hard disk can be a permanent part
of the drive and thus be
unremovable, or it can be
removable. If it is removable, it is
containedina protective cover that
is opened by the drive when access
is needed.
Help Manager The HP CDE
application that provides online
help.
$HOME The environment
variable that contains the name of
a user’s home directory. This is the
directory in which you are placed
upon logging in. Typically, this is
/home/login, where login is your
username. See also home
directory.
home directory Ashorthand way
of referring to a frequently used
directory, almost always the login
directory.
host A computer that offers one or
more services; may be local or
remote (accessible via a
network) See also cluster server.
host name See internet protocol
address.
HP CDE See HP Common
Desktop Environment.
HP Common Desktop
Environment A user interface
that draws a graphical layer over
the complexities of the other layers
of the system (the hardware,
operating system, and X Window
system), enabling you to control
your workstation by directly
manipulating graphical objects
instead of by typing commands at
a command-line prompt.
HP-UX. This is Hewlett-Packard’s
version of the UNIX® operating
system.
HP-UX cluster See cluster
node, cluster server.
I
icon A small, graphic
representationof an object.Objects
can be “iconized” (turned into
icons) to clear a cluttered
workspace. Icons can be restored to
their original appearance when
needed. Whatever processes are
executing in an object continue to
execute when the object is
iconized.
iconify See iconize.
iconize To turn a window or shell
Glossary
225
into an icon See also icon.
Initial System Loader The
program that actually controls the
loading of the operating system.
input device Any of several
piecesof hardwareequipment used
to give information to a system.
Examples include the keyboard
and the mouse See also output
device.
input window The window that
displays a program’s prompt and
any commands typed but not yet
executed.
Instant Ignition. Whentheuser’s
computer is turned on and it
automatically boots up and is
ready for use. Instant Ignition is
the result of the computer’s
operating system being preloaded
at the factory.
install server. This is a
networked computer from which
file sets and operating systems can
be installed.
internet protocol address (IP
address) A string of characters, in
the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, that
uniquely identifies a workstation
in a network. The nnn in the
format specifier above is a one- to
three-digit decimal integer
between 0 and 255, inclusive, in
which leading zeroes are optional.
The internet protocol address is
also referred to as the “IP address.”
invisible filename A filename in
which the first character is a
period (.). Invisible filenames are
not displayed by the listing
commands such as ls and ll
without additional options, such as
-a.
IP address Seeinternetprotocol
address.
ISL See Initial System Loader.
K-L
kernel The part of the operating
system that is an executable piece
of code responsible for managing
the computer’s resources. The
kernel controls the rest of the
operating system.
LAN See local area network.
LAN station address See local
area network station address.
link n. A special object that
contains the name of another
object. When you specify a link as a
pathname or part of a pathname,
226
Glossary
the system substitutes the
pathname that the link contains.
link, v. To establish a relationship
between two objects such that one
of the objects contains only the
informationrequired to associateit
with the other, “real,” object.
local area network (LAN) A
data communications system that
allows a number of independent
devices to communicate with each
other. The systems and clusters
that share data, hardware, and
software resources via Networking
Services software.
local area network system
address The label that uniquely
identifies the local area network
(LAN) connection for your
workstation at the hardware level.
This 48-bit number is preassigned
by HP on their computers and it
must never be changed.
log in v. To initially sign on to the
system so that you may begin to
use it. This creates your first user
process. See also username.
login n. A session. Or, a string of
characters that uniquely identifies
a user of the system See also
session, user account, and
username.
login directory The directory in
which you are placed when you log
in, usually your home directory
See also home directory.
Login Manager The program
that controls the initial startup of
HP CDE and accepts the user’s
username and password
login script The shell program
that runs at each login, and sets
the login environment for your
system.
M
menu bar An area at the top or
bottom of a window that contain
the titles of the pull-down or
pop-up menus for that application.
minimize button In HP CDE, a
push-button on the window frame
that turns a screen into an icon.
See also icon, iconize.
monitor type. A monitor path
name (graphics(1) through
graphics(6)) that is associated with
a particular resolution and refresh
frequency at which you want your
monitor to operate. The monitor
type is selected using the Boot
Console Interface. See Chapter 6.
Glossary
227
mouse pointer See pointer.
N
name A character string
associated with a file, directory, or
link. A name can include various
alphanumeric characters, but
never a slash (/) or null character
See also pathname.
network Two or more
workstations sharing
information See also cluster,
workstation.
network controller A printed
circuit board that passes bit
streams between the network and
the main memory of the
workstation. Coupled with the
network transceiver, the controller
also handles signal processing,
encoding, and network media
access.
node A computer that is on a
network. Each node in the network
can use the data, programs, and
devices of other network nodes,
assuming permissions are set up
properly. Each node contains main
memory and has its own disk or
shares one with another node
See also disked workstation,
diskless workstation, workstation.
node name A unique identifying
name given to a workstation in a
cluster See also cluster, node.
nonvolatile memory System
memory that retains its contents
even after workstation power is
turned off.
O
object Any file, directory, or link
in the network. See also directory,
file, link, pathname.
operating system The program
that supervises the execution of
other programs on your
workstation. For example, the
entire HP-UX system, including
the kernel and all HP-UX
commands See also kernel.
option See command option.
output device Any of several
pieces of hardware used for
receiving messages from the
computer and storing them, or
making them perceptible by
humans. Disks and tapes,
computer monitors, printers,
plotters are examples of output
devices See also input device.
output window The window that
displays a process response to your
228
Glossary
command.
P
parent directory A directory
that contains other directories,
each of which is then called a
subdirectory See also
subdirectory.
password The secret word you
enter next to the password prompt
at login time to permit only
authorized access. Keep your
password secret and change it
occasionally in order to protect
your account from unauthorized
use See also user account.
path The hardware address of a
device that is attached to the I/O
system of your workstation.
pathname A slash/separated
series of zero or more directory
names followed by a filename, that
together describe the path within
the file system from some starting
point to a destination object.
Pathnames (other than the
degenerate empty case) begin with
the name of the starting point, and
include every directory name
between the starting point and the
destination object. A pathname
ends with the name of the
destination object See also name,
object.
permissions A set of rights (read,
write, execute) associated with an
object in the file system.
Determines who may use the
object and how.
PID Process Identifier. Also
referred to as a process ID See
also process ID.
PIM. Processor Internal Memory.
The pim command is a command
used by the Boot Console Interface
for determining specific system
faults. See also processor internal
memory.
pointer Sometimes called the
“mouse pointer,” the pointer’s
location on the display corresponds
to the mouse’s location. The
pointer’s shape often depends on
the object its hot-spot covers (this
is used as a visual feedback
mechanism from a program to the
user). In the HP CDE Workspace,
the default pointer is an X; on a
window frame, it is either a simple
arrow, or an arrow with one or
more straight lines touching it (to
indicate any of the eight
window-resizing regions).
process A computing
environment in which you may
Glossary
229
execute programs; a program
currently running in the system.
process ID A unique
identification number assigned to
all processes by the operating
system. Also referred to as a PID
See also PID.
processor internal memory. A
storage area in a processor (for
example, EEPROM) that is set at
the time of a high-priority machine
check (HPMC), low-priority
machine check, soft boot or TOC,
and is composed of the architected
state save error parameters, and
hardware version-dependent
regions.
program. A unit of executable
code, in source-code or binary form.
Most HP-UX commands and
routines consist of programs.
prompt A message or symbol
displayed by the system to let you
know that it is ready for your
input.
push button A graphic control
that simulates a real-life push
button. Use the pointer and mouse
to push the button and start an
action or set a state.
R-S
RAM Random-access memory.
ROM Read-only memory.
root See superuser.
scroll bar A vertical or horizontal
bar located on the side or bottom of
a window that allows the user to
view information that does not fit
within the window.
SCSI See Small Computer
System Interface.
SCSI ID. The address of a
peripheral device connected to a
SCSI bus.
server A program that controls all
access to input and output devices.
session The time between when
you log in and when you log out.
Also called a “work session” or a
“login session.” See also current
session.
shell A command-line interpreter
program used to invoke programs.
Some examples of HP-UX shells
are the Bourne, Korn, Key, and C
shells. Sometimes referred to as a
“command interpreter.” See also
command interpreter.
230
Glossary
shell command An instruction
you give the system to execute a
utility program or shell script
See also shell script, utility
program.
shell script A file that contains
commands that the system can
interpret and run in a shell.
shutdown The process of taking
the system from multi-user state
to system administration state.
slider One of the components of a
scroll bar. The slider is the object
that is dragged along the scroll
area to cause the window’s
contents to move, exposing
previously hidden content.
Small Computer System
Interface (SCSI) An IEEE
standard for interfacing a
computer to multiple, disparate
high-speed peripherals such as a
disk drive, a CD-ROM drive, or a
scanner, etc., singly or in
combination See also Ultra2
Wide Low-Voltage Differential
SCSI, Fast Narrow Single-Ended
SCSI.
SPA. Soft Physical Address. See
also soft physical address.
soft physical address. This is a
location in system memory
associated with the DIMM cards.
standalone A workstation that is
not part of a cluster See also
cluster.
Style Manager The HP CDE
application that provides the
ability to customize various
user-interface aspects of your
system, including colors, fonts,
keyboard and mouse attributes,
session start-up and termination
behavior, and access to other
workstations.
subdirectory A directory that is
located in, or anywhere on a path
below, another directory. The
directory above the subdirectory is
called the “parent directory.” A
subdirectory is also referred to as a
“child directory See also parent
directory.
superuser Auserwithpermission
to enter any directory and make
changes to files and programs that
typical users are not allowed to
change. To “become superuser” or
“become root” means to let the
system know that you are now
assuming the role of system
administrator. You can do this
either by logging into the system
Glossary
231
as user root, or by typing su
(switch user) at a command-line
prompt. You must know the root
password to become root.
system administrator The
person responsible for system and
network installation, updating,
maintenance, and security at your
site.
system call Invocation of a kernel
process by a user program.
system name See internet
protocol address.
T-U
terminal window A terminal
window is a type of HP CDE
window that emulates a complete
display terminal. Terminal
windows are typically used to fool
window-dumb programs into
believing they are running in their
favorite terminal. When not
running programs or executing
operating system commands,
terminal windows display the
command-line prompt See also
HP Common Desktop
Environment.
title bar The rectangular area,
between the top of the window and
the window frame, that contains
the title of the window object.
TOC. See transfer of control.
transceiver A device that
transmits and receives signals.
transfer of control. Saves the
state of the processor in Processor
Internal Memory (PIM) and
pending I/O operations are not
disturbed.
Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage
Differential SCSI A 16-bit-wide
bus with low-power receivers and
drivers, which allows a cable
length of up to 12 meters and a
data transfer rate of up to 80 MB
per second See also Fast Narrow
Single-Ended SCSI, Small
Computer System Interface.
user account The system
administrator defines a user
account for every person
authorized to use the system. Each
user account contains the name
the computer uses to identify the
person (user ID), and the person’s
password. User accounts also
contain project and organization
names, to help the system
determine who can use the system
and what resources each person or
232
Glossary
organization is authorized use
See also user ID, password.
user ID The name the computer
uses to identify you. Your system
administrator assigns you a user
ID. Enter your user ID during the
login procedure when the system
displays the login prompt See
also user account.
username The name that the
system recognizes as uniquely
yours. Also known as your “login
name.” The username is also the
name that identifies you to the
mail system and other software
requiring secure entry.
utility See utility program.
utility program A program
provided with the operating
system to perform a frequently
required task, such as printing a
file or displaying the contents of a
directory See also command,
shell command.
W
window A rectangular area of the
screen for viewing information. HP
CDE allows you to create several
types of windows on the screen.
Each window is a separate
computing environment in which
you may execute programs, edit
text, display graphical images,
etc See also Workspace Manager.
Window Manager The HP CDE
program that controls the size,
placement, and operation of
windows.
working directory See current
working directory.
Workspace What the screen
becomes when you start HP CDE.
Although you can hide the
workspace under terminal
windows or other graphic objects,
you can never position anything
behindtheworkspace. All windows
and graphic objects appear stacked
“on top of” the workspace See
also HP Common Desktop
Environment, terminal window.
Workspace Manager The
program that controls the size,
placement, and operation of
windows on the HP CDE
Workspace. The Workspace
Manager is a special Window
Manager See also Window
Manager.
workstation A compact,
graphics-orientedcomputerhaving
high speed and high memory
Glossary
233
capacity. A workstation usually
includes a keyboard, a monitor,
and a system unit See also node,
disked workstation, diskless
workstation.
234
Index
Index 235
Symbols
$HOME,224
A
absolute pathname,217
active window,217
ANSI,217
argument,217
attachment unit interface (AUI),217
B
B1000/C3000
acoustics,196
declaration of conformity,193
electrical specifications,200
emissions regulations,194,195
environmental specifications,198
laser statements,196
LEDs,196
main components,89
product description,19
regulatory statements,192
safety statements,192
video statement,194
warnings,197
back up,217
battery,150
bitmap,217
boot command
notations,59
Boot Console Handler,155
accessing,158
auto boot and auto search,178
bootable media search,166
booting the workstation,164
configuration menu,161
default values,167
displaying and setting paths,168
fastboot mode,180
features,157
firmware,187
help,157
I/O slot statu,,177
information menu,162
ISL,185
LAN station address,181
main menu,160
memory configuration,175
menus,159
monitor problems,174
monitor type,170,172
PIM,183
security mode,179
service menu,163
system information,182
boot console interface,218
boot ROM,218
boot,217
bootstrap service,218
byte,218
C
CD-ROM disc,218
CD-ROM drive,218
CD-ROM,218
Central Processing Unit (CPU),218,219
child directory,219
click,219
cluster client,219
cluster node,219
cluster server,219
cluster,219
command argument,219
command interpreter,219
command option,220
command,219
Configuration,35
236 Index
Index
CD Drive,42
floppy disk drive,42
FRU,38
hard disk drive
SAM,40
hard disk drive,38
I/O cards,45
memory,43
workstation,37
configuration,220
control key sequence,220
cpu,220
CRX color graphics,220
current working directory,220
cursor,220
D
daisy-chaining,220
DDS tape drive,221
default,221
Diagrams,151
functional block,153
system power,152
dialog box,221
DIMM
card slot numbering,142
memory failures,34
memory,34
directory,221
disk,221
disked workstation,221
diskette,221
diskless booting,221
drag,221
drive,222
drop,222
E
EISA,222
Electrostatic Discharge
ESD precautions,196
environment variables,222
ETHERNET,222
F
fast, differential SCSI,222
fast-wide SCSI,231
file access permissions,223
File Manager,223
file server,223
file system,223
file,231
filename,223
Firmware
update example,188
updating,187
floppy diskette,223
floppy drive,223
front panel,98
FRU,87
battery,150
CD drive,117
DIMM cards,141
exchange and non-exchange,93
fans,109
floppy disk drive,125
hard disk drive fan,110
hard disk drive,134
I/O cards,106
I/O fan,114
LCD,145
memory
removing,143
power supply,102
power switch/LCD assembly,145
Index
Index 237
removable media,117
removal and replacement,97
speaker,114
system board
installation,148
system board,147
system fans,111
H
hard disk drive,134
hard disk drive,223
hard disk,223
HCRX color graphics,224
home directory,224
host name,224
host,224
HP Visual User Environment,224
HP VUE,224
HP-UX cluster,224
I
I/O slot
numbering,106
icon,224
iconify,224
iconize,224
Initial System Loader,225
input device,225
input window,225
internet protocol address,225
invisible filename,225
IP address,225
ISL,185
environment,59
website,48
ISL,225
K
kernel,225
L
LAN,181
LAN station address,225
LAN,181,225
LCD
location,21
symbols,22
left side panel,100
line power,200
link,225
local area network system address,226
local area network,226
log in,226
login directory,226
Login Manager,226
login script,226
M
Memory,34
failures,34
information sample,176
menu bar,226
minimize button,226
Monitor,46,31
configuration,171
monitor command,170
unsupported,46
mouse pointer,226
N
name,226
network controller,227
network,227
node name,227
node,227
238 Index
Index
nonvolatile memory,227
O
object,227
Operating System
overview,33
operating system,227
option,227
output device,227
output window,227
P
parent directory,227
partner node,228
path,228
pathname,228
PID,228
PIM,183
pointer,228
Power switch
automatic shutdown,22
soft power down procedure,22
process ID,229
process,228
Product description,19
Product specifications,191
program,229
prompt,229
push button,229
R
RAM,229
real time clock,150
Rear Panel Connectors,25
audio connectors,26
network,27
parallel,27
power cord,29
security loop,29
serial,28
TOC,29
Reference documentation,215
ROM,229
root,229
S
safety interlock switch
left side panel,150
location,100
warning,99
scroll bar,229
SCSI,201
bus differences,203
bus lengths,208
cables,204
connecting to ports,212
connectors,28
device IDs,210
mixing NSE and LVD devices on the same
bus,203
scsi restrictions,204
specifications,206
terminators,206
Ultra Narrow Single-Ended,208
Ultra2 Wide Low-Voltage Differential,208
SCSI,229
Security Lock, 24
server,229
session,229
shell command,230
shell script,230
shell,229
shutdown,230
SIMM,230
Single In-line Memory Module,230
single-ended standard SCSI,230
slider,221,230
Index
Index 239
Small Computer System Interface (SCSI),230
standalone,230
Storage Device
controls and features,22
Storage device
CD drive,23
floppy disk drive,24
Style Manager,230
subdirectory,230
superuser,231
system administrator,231
system board,147
system call,231
system name,231
T
terminal window,231
title bar,231
troubleshooting,49
boot failure,57
bootable device,52
bootable media,58
chassis codes,61
console,51
fan failures and warnings,55
HP-UX Boot,53
LCD,54
ODE,86
selftest failures,60
system verification tests,84
U
USB,27
support,32
USB hub,27